JP2020073007A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide means capable of determining the degree of ball entry efficiency for each winning hole.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine is configured so as to be capable of displaying information pertaining to ball entry efficiency into a winning hole.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 17

Description

  Pachinko game machines.

  In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered by a game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot (special game ) The state is the mainstream Pachinko game machine that can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls. In addition, a pachinko game machine that can win a prize ball when a game ball enters a winning opening such as a starting opening on a game board surface (game area) has become mainstream.

Mitsubo 302063 JP, 2013-165859, A

  However, due to the reason that the angle of the game nail changes due to the collision of the game balls flowing down the game board surface (game area), the efficiency of entering the game balls into a certain winning opening is assumed at the time of shipment of the game machine. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to determine how much the entrance efficiency for each winning opening is.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, entry state display device J10),
A launching device (eg, launching device D42) capable of launching a game ball into the game area,
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
And a period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring a period during which a game ball is being shot by a launching device (for example, launching device D42),
Based on the detection result detected by the entry determination means (eg, entry determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (eg, base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start) Mouth A10, second main game starting mouth B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Is configured to obtain
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that a display based on the entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the entry state display device J10).

  According to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to determine how much the ball entry efficiency is for each winning opening.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a unit configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an operation diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game start entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of an out-port entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the error management process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image diagram relating to a prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board reception control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a payout abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of ball path abnormality detection error control processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of driving the motor) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of motor error on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of an error notification execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of award ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a main game starting entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a memory map configuration diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of award ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of a main game starting entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of backup execution control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a main game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the main game discharge number confirmation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of a sub-game entry confirmation process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a sub-game entry ball determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the sub game side discharge number confirmation processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the RAM clear backup process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the entry state calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a ball entry information backup image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a display example of a ball entry state display device in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 111 is an example of the arrangement of the main game starting opening and the general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 112 is a list 1 of a configuration relating to information on entering a ball, which is applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 113 is a list 2 of a configuration relating to information on entering a ball, which is applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 114 is a table 3 of a configuration relating to information relating to ball entry, which is applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably, visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. And the like. In addition, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game design / special design (special drawing) or a decorative design (construction drawing), but the "special design (special drawing)" is a main control board. The display information is identification information controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board S side. The "display of identification information" is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only light emission but also color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. The “draft” refers to display contents that enhance the interest of the game, and includes, for example, fluctuations / stops of the identification information, advance notices, moving images such as animations and live images, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, and the like. A combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an advancing state) and a state retracted in the game board (opposite side to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In a configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker) that can take advantage of the above, the entry state = easy winning state and the withdrawal state = non-winning state. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number. Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning / non-winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine the stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether or not to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after the special game, etc. be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers including the winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... Is called one random number). .. Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. High probability of random selection game state, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth) In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notification of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. "Display of the state of entering the ball" is a display of information relating to entering the ball, displaying the number of balls entered into the specified entrance, displaying the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the specified entrance, multiple Display of the total number of balls entered into the entrance, the display of the number of prize balls paid out based on the entrance into multiple entrances, the display of the base value, the display of the base value in a given gaming state, the ratio of the entered balls Is displayed, the entry ratio is displayed in a predetermined game state, the role ratio is displayed, the continuous role ratio is displayed, and the cumulative number of discharged balls is displayed. "Predetermined operation on the operation member" means pressing of the sub-input button (in this example, it is determined that the button is pressed once when turned off → on for 0.5 seconds or less → off), sub-input Long press of the button (in this example, it is determined that it has been pressed when it has been turned on for 10 seconds or more), and the RAM clear button has been pressed (off in this example, on for 0.5 seconds or less) → When it is turned off, it is determined that the button has been pressed once), and when the RAM clear button is pressed for a long time (in this example, when it is turned on for 10 seconds or more, it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time) , Operation of the firing handle, etc. The "operable operating member provided on the back side of the gaming machine" is a member provided on the back side that is invisible when the player is playing the game, and is, for example, a RAM clear button. . The "operable operation member provided on the front side of the gaming machine" is a member provided on the front side that is visible when the player is playing the game, for example, a sub-input button, a firing handle. ,.

The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first type, second type, third type, pachinko game machines such as general electric officers). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, The present invention is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of an embodiment is a modification from another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that the combination of one modification with another modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, a numerical value (for example, a winning probability at the time of executing a lottery, a maximum number of rounds at a special game, a symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc.) as a specific example shown in the following embodiments and modifications, This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, a condition of the first main game side and a condition of the second main game side, a condition of a probability variation game and a non-probability variation game, and a time reduction game It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (in terms of conditions such as time shortening game, etc.) may be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. Should. For example, in the first main game side and the second main game side, the size relationship in the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be changed appropriately such that the first main game side <the second main game side or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). Further, for example, when configuring as a continuation number of the probability variation game state based on the meaning that it continues until the next big hit occurs, whether "65535" is set as the continuation number (configured to substantially continue), Alternatively, the probability variation game state is maintained until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of times of continuation, even in the choice of the realization method based on the same purpose, as long as it does not largely deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments or modifications. Should be understood to be appropriately changed.

  Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. The pachinko game machine is roughly divided into a game machine frame D and a game board Da, and the game machine frame D and the game board Da are each formed by assembling a plurality of units. Hereinafter, each unit constituting the gaming machine frame D and the gaming board Da will be sequentially described.

  First, the gaming machine frame D of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame unit D12, a front frame unit D14, a transparent plate unit (also called a glass unit) D16, a door unit (or also called a glass door) D18, and a bowl unit D17. (The upper bowl D20, the lower bowl D22, and the firing handle D44 are collectively referred to as D17).

  The outer frame unit D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed, and upper, lower, left and right frame rods (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e, left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b). The curtain plate D12c and the curtain plate D12c are appropriately assembled in a frame shape to form a unit. Here, a pair of upper and lower front frame hinges D12a-1 for assembling the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the left frame rod D12a, and an outer frame for locking the front frame unit D14 is attached to the right frame rod D12b. Locking metal fittings (not shown) on the frame side are fixed. Further, in the present embodiment, the curtain D12c is provided with a speaker D24 capable of outputting sound according to the game state, and the left and right frame rods (left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b) are vertically moved by metal. The frame rods (upper frame rod D12d and lower frame rod D12e) are made of wood, and the curtain plate D12c is made of resin.

  The front frame unit D14 is a frame body whose outer size matches the opening portion of the outer frame unit D12, and includes a front frame hinge D12a-1 and a locking metal fitting (not shown) provided in the outer frame unit D12. By a hinge mechanism D14a-1 (corresponding to these) provided at an appropriate position of the frame unit D14 and a locking device (not shown), the frame unit D14 is attached to the outer frame unit D12 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and locked.

In the front frame unit D14, a firing mechanism for firing a game ball, a game board housing mechanism for detachably housing the game board Da, a prize ball payout mechanism for awarding a prize ball, and guiding or playing a game ball. A game ball discharging mechanism and the like for collecting are provided. In the present embodiment, a game board accommodating mechanism is formed as a base body, and a front frame main body D14a to which a launching mechanism is attached and a front frame main body D14a are detachably attached, and a prize ball payout mechanism and a game ball discharge A front frame unit D14 is formed from the back mechanism unit D14b on which the mechanism is formed. Further, a pair of upper and lower glass frame hinges D14a-2 for assembling a door unit D18, which will be described later, are provided on the left side portion of the front frame body D14a, and the door unit D18 is provided on the right side portion of the front frame body D14a. A glass frame locking device (not shown) for locking is provided. Further, a ball dish unit support mechanism (including a ball dish hinge D14a-3) for assembling a ball dish unit D17, which will be described later, is provided on the lower portion of the front frame body D14a.

  The transparent plate unit D16 is for holding a plurality of (for example, two) transparent plates D16a such as glass and acrylic plates in parallel at a predetermined interval (about 20 mm), and has a U-shaped shape. After the glass is inserted into the glass holding portion (not shown) formed in the one member D16b, the second member D16c that shields the inserted portion is fitted and adhered to be integrally formed. The transparent plate unit D16 (particularly, the transparent plate D16a) can see through the game area D30 of the game board Da through an opening surface of a door unit D18, which will be described later, and a foreign object does not enter from the opening surface (the relevant one). It is difficult to access the game board Da and the game area D30 from the opening surface).

  The door unit (glass door) D18 is provided at a proper position of the glass frame hinge D14a-2 and the glass frame locking device (not shown) provided in the front frame unit D14 (corresponding to these). The hinge mechanism and the locking metal fitting (not shown) are attached to the front frame unit D14 so as to be laterally opened and closed and locked. The door unit D18 has an outer size that substantially matches the outer shape of the game board Da, and has an opening D18a provided in the center with a smaller area than the transparent plate unit D16. A game board Da and a game area D30, which will be described later, are visible through D16.

On the back side of the door unit D18, a transparent plate unit holding portion D18b for holding the transparent plate unit D16, and a decoration portion provided with decoration around the opening D18a so as to obtain an electric decoration effect or a visual effect. D18c and the like are also formed. In the present embodiment, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is arranged at the upper right portion of the door unit D18. The frame decoration lamp D18-L may be turned on to display information about a ball to be described later.
Details of the component configuration of the door unit D18 will be described later.

  The bowl unit D17 includes a bowl unit supporting mechanism (including the bowl hinge D14a-3) provided in the front frame unit D14 and an engaging member (for example, an engagement member) provided at an appropriate position of the bowl unit D17. It is detachably attached to the front frame unit D14 by the combination member D17a-1). In addition, the ball dish unit D17 can be detached from the front frame unit D14 only when the door unit D18 is opened and closed, so that the ball dish unit D17 can be removed while being used for a game without providing a key for the gaming machine. A difficult structure (for example, a structure in which a part of the door unit D18 and a part of the bowl unit D17 wrap) is adopted.

  The ball dish unit D17 is formed in a square outer shape, and has an upper ball dish D20 for supplying game balls to the launching device at the upper part and a large number of prize balls at the lower part. When an excessive amount of game balls is supplied to D20, a lower ball plate D22 that can store the excessive amount of game balls is formed. On the right side of the lower ball plate D22, the player can operate the launching strength of the launch device (game). A firing handle D44 for adjusting the hitting position of the ball is provided. Further, on a partial surface of the ball dish unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper bowl D20), a sub-input button SB operated by the player at the time of rendering, and a lending operation section for making a request for lending a game ball ( (Not shown) is provided. A speaker D24 is provided between the upper bowl D20 and the lower bowl D22. The details of the component configuration of the bowl unit D17 will be described later.

The schematic configuration of the gaming machine frame D in the present embodiment is as described above, but as described above, the gaming machine frame D is composed of a plurality of units, and more specifically, in front of the outer frame unit D12. The front frame unit D14 (including the game board Da), and the transparent plate unit D16, the door unit D18, and the bowl unit D17 in front of the front frame unit D14 are detachably (or openable / closable). Therefore, the matching portion of each unit has a minute gap for facilitating the opening / closing operation and the attaching / detaching operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, in the matching portion of each unit, a labyrinth structure (uneven shape in cross-section) It is desirable (but not limited to this) to employ a structure such that

  In this embodiment, the door unit D18 and the bowl unit D17 have a separate structure, but they may have an integrated structure. Further, in the present embodiment, the structure for paying out the physical game medium according to the game result is adopted, but it may be configured to perform electronic medium management. In that case, the lower ball dish D22, the prize ball payout mechanism, etc. are not necessary, and a game machine form (so-called enclosed circulation form) in which the played balls are returned to the upper ball dish D20 and electronically managed is adopted. It should be supplemented that the dish unit D17, the door unit D18, etc. will be provided with an operation unit for settlement / rental using an electronic medium.

  Next, on the game board Da, a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of game nails and a mechanism such as a wind turbine, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, a general winning opening P10, and a first winning opening P10. Special winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth C80 is set up. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  First, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball. Generates mouth entrance information.

  Next, the second main game starting opening B10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting mouth entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the second main game starting entrance B10, and the second main game start indicating the entrance when entering the ball. Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second main game starting port B10 {a ball receiving member formed in a flat plate shape (hereinafter referred to as a ball receiving member. ) Is retracted from the game area D30} and an open state in which game balls can enter (state in which the ball receiving member projects into the game area D30). Here, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment employs an electric accessory (so-called Vero electric) in which the ball receiving portion slides back and forth, and when it is in the open state, the game is played. The ball receiving member protruding into the area D30 is configured to receive the game ball and guide the game ball to the second ball detection device B11s (arranged inside the game board). Further, in the present embodiment, as the electric accessory, an electric accessory in which the ball receiving member slides back and forth so that it is difficult to receive the game ball in the opening operation in a short time is adopted. Without limitation, a so-called tulip-type electric accessory that can take a closed state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state may be adopted. ..

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, while being easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. . It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

  In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and The two main game starting openings B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other, and in that case, the upper part of the second main game starting opening B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game starting opening A10. You may.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting opening H10, and generates the auxiliary game starting entrance ball information that indicates the entering ball when entering. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

  Next, the general winning opening P10 includes a general winning opening ball detection device P11s. The general winning opening entrance detecting device P11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the general winning opening P10, and generates general winning entrance information indicating the entrance of the game ball. By entering the game balls into the general winning opening P10, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. A plurality of general winning openings P10 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). It is easy for all of the players to enter the general winning opening P10. There is no problem even if the number of general winning openings P10 is changed, and even if only the game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are easy to enter, the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area) Only the game balls that flow down (as a reference) may be easy to enter.

  Here, in the present embodiment, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10, on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) The game ball flowing down) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (however, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is not limited to this. Also, it may be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10}.

  Next, above the outlet C80 (in particular, on the right side of the game area D30), a first big winning opening C10 and a second big winning opening C20 are provided, and the right side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game ball flowing down (reference) is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening C80.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol, and has a horizontal rectangular shape, and is an outlet. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above C80 (in particular, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10, the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first special winning opening electric auditors C11d (and the first big winning Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates that entering when entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won in the first special winning opening C10 or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the (1) The special winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape, and the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called, It is a slide-type attacker, and the special winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down through the game area D30, and in the advanced state, the box-shaped member. The large winning opening is closed due to the obstruction of acceptance of the game ball into the game, and when the game ball is in the retracted state, acceptance of the game ball into the box-shaped member is allowed and the large winning opening is opened. It is also suitable for the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open rectangular shape when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the mouth C80 (in particular, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and the second special winning Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s. Next, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is configured such that the second special winning opening C20 is placed in the normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state in which the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. It is made variable (the second special winning opening solenoid C23 is excited and made variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape, and the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided at the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It is a slide-type attacker, and the special winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down through the game area D30. The large winning opening is closed because the acceptance of the game balls into the game is blocked, and when the game balls are in the retracted state, the large winning opening is opened by allowing the game balls to be received into the box-shaped member. It is also suitable for the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and a missing "-" (however, it is not limited to this, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed, a 7-segment LED is used. It is preferable to use and display by symbols or the like. In addition, the display of the number of holdings is not limited to the configuration of four lamps, and the number of holdings of up to four can be displayed (for example, the number of holdings is one lamp. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blinking, hold number 3: medium-speed blinking, hold number 4: high-speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set so that it is inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), a later-described effect A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image display including a decorative pattern that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol / second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect including a variable display of a decorative symbol and the like is executed. Here, the display area SG10 is a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols that mimics a game of a slot machine, for example, a first holding display unit SG12 (and a second holding display unit SG13) that displays main game holding information. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding auxiliary game symbol fluctuations (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations not executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by blinking or the like. The game effect lamp D26 may be turned on to display information about a ball to be described later.

  Next, the entry state display device J10, the entry status of the game ball into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10 and the general winning opening P10 {non-probability variation game state and non-time-reducing game It is a display device that displays information indicating whether the state of the ball entered in the state (main game probability change flag off and main game short time flag off) is normal or abnormal. It should be noted that if the ball entry status is abnormal, the gaming nail that guides the game ball to flow down toward the general winning opening P10 is bent in a direction different from that at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, and the general winning opening P10 is entered. It is difficult to enter the game even if you continue to shoot game balls toward it. In the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 and the game ball entering the general winning opening P10 is outside the expected range. If it is present, it is determined to be abnormal. Further, as will be described later in detail, the elements that can be displayed on the ball entering state display device J10 are not limited to those described above, and the base value (the number of prize balls paid out by a predetermined winning port is defined as the number of game balls). It is a value obtained by multiplying a value obtained by dividing by the total number of fired balls by 100, which will be described in detail later), and various elements can be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (ie, the game Main control board M that performs (control directly related to the profit of the person), and production control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various productions on the production display device SG that adds interest to the game content. SM
And, a sub-sub-control section SS that mainly performs an effect display, an error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the error occurrence, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and winning of each prize hole. Accordingly, the prize ball payout device (set base) KE including the prize ball payout unit KE10 for paying out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball plate D20, and the payout operation by the prize ball payout unit KE10 are controlled. The prize ball payout control board KH, an error indicator KH3 for displaying an occurrence status of an error related to payout (for example, 7-segment display), an error canceling switch KH3a for canceling a predetermined error, and an upper bowl plate D20. A launch device D42 that launches a game ball (reserved ball) to the game area D30 one by one, a launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of the launch device D42, and a pachinko game machine. And a power supply unit E supplies power to the parts, the power switch Ea such a switch for turning on and off the pachinko machine is provided on the front frame unit D14 rear surface (player side opposite).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine and the operating principle for paying out the game balls according to the present embodiment will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. Then, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to a stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters a winning opening in the game area, a prize signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and a prize ball signal is sent to the prize ball payout control board KH. To do. Alternatively, the game ball lending device such as the card unit R makes a request for ball lending to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes payout of game balls. As shown in FIG. 5, by rotating the stepping motor KE10m, the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) is rotated, and the game ball is It is paid out one by one. The paid game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. Incidentally, as for the cross section C-C, as shown in the drawing, it should be supplemented that a cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easily visible) is shown.

  Further, the lower part of FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the rotor position confirmation sensor (delivery motor position sensor) KE10ms and the rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photo sensor that has a pair of measuring units and detects an object between the measuring units by projecting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measuring units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is formed with six concave portions along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion, When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion, it is turned on (state in the lower stage of FIG. 4).

Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as the change / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, and hold display and notice display. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the computer (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.), backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information when power is cut off are installed. ing.

  Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s, second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning opening ball detecting device P11s}, drive solenoid not shown (the above-mentioned first big winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning Mouth solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), and the like, game peripherals (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B in the figure) that are indispensable input / output devices for the progress of the game. , 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) are electrically connected, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM / sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize-ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production / game progress state, etc. can be transmitted to the sub control board S.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 6, the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. The main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. One-way communication) is possible.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by a player, and accepts a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R (card unit R) for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit section (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launcher D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided separately from the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

Next, the sub-control board S, as described above, the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative design, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown, but so-called effect. Motor, solenoid, etc.) of a movable body accessory for use in connection. Further, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), it is possible to start or end the measurement of the base value, execute a predetermined effect, start displaying the maintenance mode, or the like. Is also connected to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub input button detection device SBs detects that the sub input button SB has been operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub control board S has the sub main control section SM and the sub sub control section SS, and the sub main control section SM controls the voice output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. Is configured to be. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, by executing the voice control by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

  Next, the flow path of the game ball used for the game will be described with reference to the image diagram of the flow path of the game ball in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls shot in the game area D30 are each of the ball entrances {first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, first big winning opening C10, Two major winning openings C20, general winning openings P10, out openings C80} are entered, and they are guided into the game machine (inside the game machine frame D) through the entrance sensors corresponding to each entrance. . Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game starting port A10 passes through the first main game starting port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all the game balls guided into the game machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged to the outside of the game machine. In addition, although not particularly shown in this example, a switch for confirming a ball entry {each ball entry port (eg, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, first big winning port C10, first 2 major winning opening C20, a general winning opening) is a switch through which a game ball that has entered the ball passes, and has one or a plurality of switches different from the switch for detecting the entrance into each winning opening} It is assumed that

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 7. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first / second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) relating to the effect, and the prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M, are communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM), the sub-sub-control unit SS (production display means SS) for performing image production, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and frame decoration lamps D18-L, The speaker D24 and the like are also electrically connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. Incidentally, the main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are data and programs in terms of hardware. Is formed of a ROM and a RAM for storing the data, an element such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each unit that is supposed to be included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

First, the main control board M, game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of information for the game, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, the progress of games such as special games and specific games. A game progress means MP for controlling the game state, a game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information relating to the game state and the like, and a fraud detection information management means ME for controlling processing related to errors and fraud detected by the gaming machine (and Fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb) for temporarily storing information related to error detection and fraud detection, and measuring the entry status into various entrances, or relating to entry status into various entrances Maintenance mode control means MO that controls the process of executing display, and various game information on the game peripheral device side (particularly, the sub-main control section SM side) {for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol {for example, 16R large , 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss}, information on variation mode (for example, variation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} information transmission control means MT (and A command transmission buffer MT10) for accumulating untransmitted commands, an external signal output control means MG for outputting information on a game to the hall computer HC via an external relay terminal board G, and a game ball for various winning openings. And a prize-ball payout determining means MH for controlling the prize-ball payout control board KH so as to pay a predetermined prize-ball based on winning.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port or the like), and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. A random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entering each starting opening during variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. is doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start opening A10 (and the first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2). Judgment means MJ11-A, a second main game starting mouth entrance judging means MJ11-B for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game starting mouth B10, and a game ball for the auxiliary game starting mouth H10. And the auxiliary game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H for determining whether or not has flowed, and the first prize opening entrance determination for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first prize opening C10 Means MJ11-C10 and the second big winning opening C20, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20 and the general winning opening P10 General winning a prize entrance determination means MJ11-P for determining whether or not It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered 80, the outlet entrance determination means MJ11-C80, and whether or not the game ball has entered (discharging is detected) in the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, Total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 (and total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 which counts the number of relevant balls), and temporary entry related information for temporarily storing information relating to entry into the entrance With the storage means MJ10b, under a specific situation (for example, a specific game state such as a non-stochastic variation game state and a non-time-reduced game state, etc.), the first main game start opening A10 or the second main game start opening B10 is entered. A starting mouth entrance number counter MJ12c for measuring the number of game balls played, and a general winning opening P10 under a specific situation (for example, a particular gaming state such as a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state). I entered the ball Has a generally ball entrance counter MJ13c for measuring the number of tricks sphere, the.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game starting opening A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-A for acquiring a random number (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation mode determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and a second main game starting port B10. It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main number) according to the determination result. Second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B for acquiring game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side random number can be acquired, and the auxiliary game random number for acquiring the random number based on the determination result. The acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H That.

Here, the “random number” in the claims and the specification including the above description is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “allocated” according to the type of random number (eg, winning random number or variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, a method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing values along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears. ) Is defined by a random value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30, the hold digestion control means MJ31 for controlling the process related to hold digestion and variation start, and the first main game side random number obtained in a situation in which variation permission of the first main game symbol is not down. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, the first for holding the random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the variation permission of the first main game symbol is given based on the determination result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the main game symbol holding means MJ32-A and the second main game side random number acquired in the situation where the variation permission of the second main game symbol is not down, and based on the determination result, The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the change permission of the second main game symbol comes down, and the change permission of the auxiliary game symbol Going down It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the auxiliary game side random number acquired in a situation where it is not stored, and based on the result of the determination, the random number is held in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the variation permission of the auxiliary game symbol is given. It has an auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for doing.

  Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j that determines whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four, the random numbers are combined with the holding order. In order to temporarily store in the form, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively. Have

  Next, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not to shift to the special game and whether or not to open the second main game starting port electric auditorium B11d. It has a symbol content determining means MN40 for determining and a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. Here, the win / loss lottery means MN10 is a first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A for performing win / win lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game win / loss lottery means for performing win / loss lottery on the second main game symbol. It has an MN11-B and an auxiliary game win / loss lottery means MN11-H for performing a win / win lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / win lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game win / win lottery means MN11-H are referred to when the win / win lottery about the first main game symbol is performed. The first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A, and the second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B that is referred to when the win / win lottery for the second main game symbol is performed, and the win / win lottery for the auxiliary game symbol Each has an auxiliary game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), and acquisition Based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / losing result. Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or losing. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the obtained game content determination random number (second main game random number). It has auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / losing result / game state. In addition, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / losing result / game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (for example, regular game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table. ).

  Next, the display control means MP10 is on the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. On the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g of the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 for controlling the stop display after changing the first main game symbol, a predetermined time assistance It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling the stop display after changing the game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a zero-clearable first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (for example, a decrement counter that is subtracted at predetermined intervals. , And so on, the same kind of counter can be mounted). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening / closing the second main gaming starting entrance electric auditors object B11d is satisfied. Second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B and second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing B11d. -B, the game ball remaining in the second main game starting port electric auditory product B11d after closing the second main game starting port electric auditory product B11d is detected by the second main game starting port entrance detecting device B11s. It has a second main game starting opening entrance ball waiting timer MP22t2, which measures the time to wait until.

  Next, the special game control means MP30, the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and the special game transition condition is satisfied, the contents of the special game (Concretely, the special winning opening in the open state, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) is determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second special winning opening C20 under predetermined conditions, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening) C10 and the second special winning opening C20 opening and closing time) special game time management means MP34 for performing, the distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing the distribution game, has. Here, the special game execution means MP33 is the first and second special winning opening electric auditors opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first special winning opening electric winning combination C11d and the second special winning opening electric winning combination C21d. , Has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 includes a special game timer MP34t that manages round time, an open timer MP34t2 that measures the opening time of the special winning opening, and a first special winning opening C10 (or a second special winning opening C20). The game ball remaining in the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) after being closed is detected by the first big winning opening winning detecting device C11s (or the second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s). It further has a special winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3, which counts the time to wait until. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table. Although not shown in detail, is a table that defines the special winning opening to be opened, the maximum number of rounds, the content of execution of one round, etc. Also, the first round is executed after the special game is started. The start demo time, which is the waiting time until it is played, the end demo time, which is the waiting time from the end of the final round to the end of the special game, etc., are also predetermined in this table).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time-reduced game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the probability shortening game state is satisfied. It has a time saving end condition judging means MP52 for judging. Each of them has a time saving counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving. Here, the probability variation gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning or losing lottery of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol has a higher probability than the non-probability variation gaming state, and the time shortening gaming state. The mean value of the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the non-time shortened game state, and / or the second main game starting port electric accessory per unit time It means a gaming state in which the ease of opening B11d is improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time reduction. function). Furthermore, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a winning symbol with a high probability, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start port electric auditors product B11d is relatively extended ( Open time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (probability variation game without time saving limit). except for). That is, the number of hours saved is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The probability variation end condition determination means MP51 and the time saving end condition determination means MP52 perform a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability for each symbol variation. It may have a function (a so-called pachinko game machine having a falling lottery function).

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB, the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop) First / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, ON / OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of hours saved, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the currently fluctuating first or second main game symbol (first or second main game symbol for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H is an auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol relating to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (the auxiliary game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, the prize-ball payout determination means MH sends and receives the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj (and transmission / reception) for transmitting / receiving information relating to prize-ball payout (and error detection and fraud detection) with the prize-ball payout control board KH side. Payout command temporary storage means MHsjb) which temporarily stores the information, a prize ball number counter MHc for counting the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls, and the payout of prize balls is not completed (prize ball payout). Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb for temporarily storing information related to unpaid prize balls, which has not received information related to payout completion from the control board KH side.

  Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 that can display and stop the first main game symbol. ,have. Regarding the first main game starting opening A10, the first main game starting opening entrance detecting device A11s for detecting the entrance into the first main game starting opening A10, and the entrance is a normal entrance. It has a first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2 for confirming whether there is any, and only at one of the entrances (particularly only at the first main game starting entrance detection device A11s) Is detected, the processing relating to the fraudulent activity or the occurrence of the error is executed (details will be described later). When double-checking the incoming ball using two sensors in this way, it is necessary to use a combination of sensors with different detection mechanisms (for example, a non-contact photo sensor and a contact physical switch). However, it is suitable for detecting fraud.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first / second main game common peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (big hit). And a second big winning opening C20, a general winning opening P10 for paying out the game ball when the game ball wins, and a winning status display device capable of displaying the status of entering the various entrances. From J10, an out opening C80 for taking in a game ball that has not been entered into the starting opening or winning opening of the game ball launched in the game area D30 into the gaming machine, and the starting opening, the entrance opening, or the exit opening C80 A total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for detecting a game ball discharged from the game machine, which is provided on a path for discharging the game ball taken into the game machine to the outside of the game machine, is provided.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control section) SM, the display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the determination processing and the display control processing of the effect contents related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 for controlling, an error notification control means SM30 for controlling error notification when an error occurs, and an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub controller SS side. The above means will be described in detail below.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing the symbol information and the display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the determination process and the display control process of the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the holding of the design number that controls the retained number management of the decorative symbol and the retained display process. The information display control unit SM22, the background effect display control unit SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, the notice effect display control unit SM24 that controls the notice effect content determination process and the display control process, and the reach effect content. Reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the determination processing and the display control processing.

  Next, the error notification control means SM30 has an error occurrence determination means SM31 for determining whether or not an error has occurred.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M, and is related to the design symbol display content determining means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol, and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. Design information related storage temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop design information, various flags, etc.), and a design variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decorative design. ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

  Next, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 has a drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding suspension related to the decorative symbol.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect (in this example, displayed on the back of the decorative pattern, the possibility of executing the special game based on the information about the hold) Background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of (effect for informing / notifying) and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect (in this example, the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display, and the degree of expectation of transition to the special game in the change). In order to temporarily store information relating to the notice effect display, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and the display timing of the effect suggesting / notifying the possibility of executing the special game based on the information about the hold. The notice production related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, reach effect (mainly the reach state by the combination of the decorative symbols that are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol and are stopped and displayed). It is an effect that is executed after being notified that it has become, but it also includes the effect that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative pattern even if the reach state is not reached) It has a reach effect display content determination means SM25n to be decided and a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information relating to the reach effect display.

  Next, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side, and the image for displaying the image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. Display control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control section SM side and information related to various image displays.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub-game control It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device that is controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initialization (not shown, initialization of registers, setting of input / output ports, etc.), in step 1002, the main control board M is a RAM clear button. Check the input port of, and whether the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E is operated, that is, whether the operation of clearing the contents of RAM is intentionally performed by the manager of the game arcade or the like. Determine whether. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits the ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing. Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1002, at step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information that is present). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM). If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M stores various data stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power interruption. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and the control command described later). It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in the present example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 10B is executed), and the process proceeds to step 1018. .. Note that after step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms), in step 2000, the main control board M executes a later-described ball detection process. Next, in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric auditors product drive determination processing described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes a later-described special game operating condition determination process. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 2100, the main control board M executes the number of entered balls determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes a fraud detection information management process. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, in step 3000, the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.) described later. Next, in step 1990, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was used.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. To be done. That is, when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the time of NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power cut-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the incoming ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2150, the ball entrance determination means executes an auxiliary game start opening ball entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the entry determination means executes a main game starting opening entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the entry determination means executes a first (second) special winning opening entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2400, the entry determination means executes a general winning opening entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2500, the incoming ball determination means executes a later-described discharged ball detection process. Next, in step 2600, the entrance determination means executes an out-mouth entrance detection process described later. Next, at step 2700, the entry determination means executes the prize ball determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether the auxiliary game starting entrance detection continuation flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-H determines that the input from the auxiliary playing opening entrance detecting device H11s is the incoming detection time (above that time, auxiliary playing opening). When the ball entrance detection device H11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that a ball has entered the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination unit MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game starting flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in step 2158, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball determining means MJ11-H detects the input end time from the auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s (above that time, the auxiliary game start). When the mouth entrance ball detection device H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time when it is considered that the auxiliary game starting mouth entrance ball detection device H11s has passed. If Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, The process shifts to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2154 or step 2160, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flow chart of the main game starting mouth entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the first main game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-A refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-A inputs from the first main game starting entrance entrance detecting device A11s as the entrance detection time (more than that time, When the first main game starting opening entrance detecting device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball entering the first main starting opening A10). In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 2210, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game starting entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. ..

Next, in step 222-1-1, the first main game starting entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A determines that the current game state is a non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game is It is determined whether the time saving flag is off). It should be noted that the case of the non-time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time saving flag is off, or the case where the auxiliary game time saving flag is off (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is not activated). Further, the case of the time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time saving flag is on, or the case where the auxiliary game time saving flag is on (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is operating). If Yes in step 2221-2, in step 2212-2, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A is not executing the special game at present (condition device operation flag is off). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A increments the counter value of the starting entrance entrance number counter MJ12c by 1 (increment), Move to 2222.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the input from the entry number counter MJ10c is the detection time (if the first main game starting mouth entry detection device A11s does not detect the input for the time or more, the game It is determined whether or not the ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the ball has passed the first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Next, in step 2214, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game starting entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, at step 2215, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game starting entrance long time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , And proceeds to step 2222. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Next, at step 2222, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag is off. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B inputs from the second main game starting entrance entrance detecting device B11s as the entrance detection time (more than that time, When the second main game starting opening entrance detecting device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball entering the second main starting opening B10). If Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game starting entrance valid period flag is turned on. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game starting flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, at step 2230, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game starting entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .

  Next, at step 2231-1, the second main game starting entrance ball determining means MJ11-B determines that the current game state is a non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortened game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game is It is determined whether the time saving flag is off). If Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, whether or not the second main game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-B is not currently executing the special game (the condition device operation flag is off) Determine whether. If Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B increments the counter value of the starting mouth entrance number counter MJ12c by 1 (increment), Move to 2240. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time shortening flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device When the operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10, 1 is added to the counter value of the starting opening entering number counter MJ12c. It is configured.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game starting opening B10 is not effective), in step 2232, the second main game starting entry ball determination The means MJ11-B determines that there is an illegal ball entry in the second main game starting port B10, sets a second main game starting port illegal ball entering command (command to the sub-control board S side), and step 2240 Move to. Even if No in Step 2231-1, Step 2231-2, or Step 2224, the process proceeds to Step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2233, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B detects the input from the second main game starting entrance entrance detecting device B11s at the detection time (above the time, If the second main game starting mouth entrance detecting device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time it is considered that the game ball has passed the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s). judge. If Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B has the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag, which is in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn off. Next, at step 2238, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game starting entrance long time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , And proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in step 2233, the process proceeds to step 2240.

  Next, at step 2240, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A (second main game starting entrance determining means MJ11-B) determines the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s (first 2 Whether or not the main game starting opening entrance detecting device B11s is ON for a fraud detection time (a time that exceeds the time detected as a normal entrance and is determined to be fraudulent) To determine. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A (second main game starting entrance determining means MJ11-B) stores the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) main game starting opening long time detection flag in the flag area is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, if No in step 2240, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2350).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance entering determining means MJ11-C20) refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, It is determined whether or not the 1 (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the first special winning opening winning determination device MJ11-C10 (the second special winning entrance determining device MJ11-C20) determines the first big winning opening winning detecting device C11s (first Is the input from the two major winning opening award detection devices C21s) ON for at least the incoming detection time (the time when the incoming detection device detects an input, when the input is detected, it is considered that there is an incoming ball at the incoming entrance)? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance entering determining means MJ11-C20) refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , It is determined whether or not the flag during the first (second) special winning opening valid period is ON. If Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance entering determining means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) special winning opening ball flag inside is turned on. Next, in step 2360, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance determining means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, The first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the entry of the game ball is detected while the entry into the special winning opening is not effective), in step 2361, the first special winning opening entry determining means MJ11-C10 ( The second special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) determines that there is an illegal entrance in the special winning opening, and the first (second) special winning opening illegal entrance command (to the sub-control board S side) Command) and shifts to step 2370. Even if No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2362, the first special winning opening winning determination device MJ11-C10 (the second special winning opening entering determination device MJ11-C20) is the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s. When the input from (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the detection time {when the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) has not detected the input. , It is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time it is considered that the game ball has passed through the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s). If Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning entrance entrance determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) special winning hole detection continuation flag therein is turned off. Next, at step 2368, the first special winning opening ball entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) is located in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The 1 (second) special winning opening long time detection flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

  Next, in step 2370, the first special winning opening winning determination means MJ11-C10 (the second special winning opening winning determination means MJ11-C20), the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second big winning opening If the input from the prize detection device C21s) is an illegality detection time (when the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects an input, the first big winning opening C10 is detected. It is determined whether or not the time is equal to or more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the (second big winning opening C20) is detected}. If Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance entering determining means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag therein is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2370, the next process (process in step 2400) is performed.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. In addition, the general winning opening P10 is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball, which is a entrance for paying out the prize ball when the game ball enters, but does not affect the progress of the game. It is equipped with a winning opening detection device P11s. In addition, the winning determination means MJ10 has a general winning entrance determining means P11s for determining whether or not there is a winning in the general winning opening.

First, in step 2402, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the general prize-winning entrance determining means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general prize-winning entrance detecting device is the entrance detection time (equal to or more than the general prize-winning entrance detecting device. When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that there is a ball at the general winning opening). If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening entrance flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2410, the general winning a prize entrance determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning a prize detection continuation flag in the flag area of the temporary prize related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2411-1, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time reduction flag is OFF) is determined. If Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the general winning a prize entrance determination means MJ11-P determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). To do. If Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general entry number counter MJ13c (increment), and proceeds to step 2420. . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the general prize-winning entrance determination means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general prize-winning entrance detecting device is the entrance detection time (more than the time, general prize-winning entrance When the detection device does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has passed the general winning opening detection device). If Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2418, the general winning opening entry determining means turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. Even if the result of step 2404, step 2411-1, 2411-2, or step 2412 is No, the process proceeds to step 2420. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time shortening flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device When the operation flag is OFF), when a game ball enters the general winning opening P10, 1 is added to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c.

  Next, in step 2420, the general winning opening entrance determination device MJ11-P detects an input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device as an illegal detection time {above that time, the general winning entrance entrance detecting device detects the input. In this case, it is determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than the time when it is considered that an illegal entrance into the general winning opening has been detected}. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the general winning a prize entrance determining means MJ11-P turns on the general winning a prize long time detection flag in the flag area of the prize related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and then, Process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 refers to the flag area of the incoming-ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 detects that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the ball detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input, the total is detected). It is determined whether or not the discharge confirmation sensor C90s is ON for more than the time it is considered that a ball has entered. If Yes in step 2504, in step 2506 the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2508, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the total discharge confirmation sensor MJ11-C90 detects the input end time of the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or more). If not, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time when it is considered that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has passed. If Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2514, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation long time detection flag in the flag area of the incoming-ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next process (process of step 2600). ). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the out-port entrance detecting process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 refers to the entrance-related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the out-hole detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the out-mouth entrance determination device MJ11-C80 determines that the input from the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s is the entrance detection time (the time is equal to or longer than the out- entrance entrance detection device C80s. When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time it is considered that there is a ball at the outlet C80. If Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the process of step 2620. Move to.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the out mouth entrance determination device MJ11-C80 detects the input end time of the out mouth entrance detecting device C80s (equal to or more than the time, the out mouth entrance detecting device C80s). Does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out-mouth entrance ball detection device C80s. In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-hole detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2615, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process moves to step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the out-mouth entrance determination device MJ11-C80 detects that the input from the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s is a fraudulent detection time (when the input is detected by the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s for a certain period or more). When it is present, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than a time period when it is considered that an illegal ball has been entered into the outlet C80. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the next process The process proceeds to (processing of step 2700). On the other hand, if No in step 2620, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the prize-ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the award ball payout determination means MH provides the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb with information indicating that the award ball relating to the first main game starting opening A10 is to be paid out (for example, the number of award ball payouts). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process moves to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. If Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the prize ball payout determination means MH gives information to the payout prize ball information temporary storage means MHb that the prize balls associated with the second main game starting opening B10 are paid out (for example, the prize ball payout number). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2722. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process moves to step 2722.

  Next, at step 2722, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first (second) special winning opening entry flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the first (second) special winning opening entry flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, in step 2724, the prize sphere payout determination means MH determines the counter value of the prize sphere number counter MHc as the number of prize sphere payouts (13 in this example) related to the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20). ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb with the information that the prize balls associated with the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20) are to be paid out. (For example, information relating to the number of paid prize balls) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process moves to step 2732.

  Next, in step 2732, the prize-ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the prize-ball payout determination means MH turns off the general prize-winning ball entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the prize-ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid prize-ball information temporary storage means MHb with information that the prize-balls related to the general winning a prize are to be paid out (for example, information related to the number of prize-ball payouts). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, if No in step 2732, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1100). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out of the first main game starting opening A10 and the number of prize balls paid out of the second main game starting opening B10 are the same three balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of prize balls paid out may be changed. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out from the first main game starting opening A10 may be changed to 4 balls, and in such a case, the number of prize balls paid out from the second main game starting opening B10. May be 1 to 3 balls, which is less than the number of prize balls to be paid out from the first main game starting opening A10.

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting mouth entry determining means MJ11-H refers to the inside of the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether the auxiliary game starting flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game starting flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not the number of holding balls is the upper limit (for example, four). .. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H holds a random number in the form of setting the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with information indicating how many pieces are held. Is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in Step 1102 and Step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 1200).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting opening electric auditors thing opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric auditors opening flag is OFF. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. It is determined whether it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and the holding ball for the auxiliary game symbol. It is determined whether or not there is. If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). Along with the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referenced, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time saving flag). When is ON, a winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is OFF) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in the present example, the stop symbol "D0, D1, D2" exists, and the stop symbol that is the winning symbol is "D1, D2", which is caused by the stop of each. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing) and stopped. When the design is "D1, D2", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing). Also, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed), and stop When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed). In the non-time-reducing game, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0", and in the time-reducing game, the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1".

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball concerned with the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired assist. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting port electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “win” (D1, D2 in this example). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the hit pattern and the game state on the auxiliary game side, and is in an open mode (for example, at the time shortening game). In the case of the hit symbol "D1", the opening mode is 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed. In the case of the hit symbol “D2”, 0.2 Second open, 0.8 second closed, 5 second open) is determined, and the second main game start opening electric auditors product opening timer MP22t-B has a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric auditors. Set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric auditors opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B starts the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B, and then the second main gaming starting mouth electric winning combination. Object B11d is opened. Next, at step 1238, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B is in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, the flag during the second main game starting opening valid period. Is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1242.

  Next, at step 1242, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B to determine the opening time of the electric auditors. It is determined whether the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d, and at the same time, the auxiliary gaming state. The electric accessory open flag in the flag area of the memory means MB10-H is turned off. Next, at step 1248, the second main game starting opening electric auditors thing opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B sets the second main gaming starting entrance ball waiting timer MP22t2 to the electric auditors entrance waiting time (3 in this example). Seconds) and start. Next, at step 1250, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the second main game starting opening entrance waiting timer MP22t2, and whether the timer value is 0 or not. To judge. If Yes in step 1250, in step 1252, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B is in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The flag is turned off during the valid period, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300). In this way, in this example, the valid period of the second main game starting port (the period during which the flag during the second main game starting port valid period is ON) is the opening timing of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. From, until the second main game start mouth electric auditors thing B11d is closed until the electric auditors enter ball waiting time (3 seconds in this example) elapses, and the second main game start mouth electric auditors thing B11d is closed. However, it is configured such that it can wait for a game ball to enter for the amount of time required to enter the electric accessory.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, in the case of No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and in the case of No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, step 1240 or step 1250, The process shifts to the next process (process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to check whether the first main game starting flag is ON. judge. Yes in step 1302
In the case of, in step 1304, the first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and holds the main game (especially the first main game side). It is determined whether the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1306, in step 1308, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a random number for win / loss determination for determining the win / fail, a random number for design to determine the winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (hold generation command) related to the acquired first main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step S1), and the process proceeds to step 1322. On the other hand, if No at Step 1302 or Step 1306, the process proceeds to Step 1322.

  Next, in step 1322, the second main game starting entrance entrance determination means MJ11-B refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and whether or not the second main game start flag is ON. To judge. If Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game starting flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and holds the main game (especially the second main game side). It is determined whether the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning / missing lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired, as in the first main game content determining random number. By the way, an acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and an acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, a win / loss lot number for the first main game and a win / loss lot number for the second main game) The acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1330, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (hold generation command) related to the acquired second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1322 or step 1326, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing relating to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol does not exist. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and moves to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes the second main game symbol display processing described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball for the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball for the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to prioritize the execution of the second main game symbol on hold, but it is not limited to this (holddown based on the winning order or both main game symbols are concurrently parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the holding digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is not in the special game (or the condition device is operating), and is not in the main game symbol fluctuation, and the condition that there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, when a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variable start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the holding digestion control means MJ31, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) Temporarily stored, while reading the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game The symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information that is temporarily stored is shifted (holding digest processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / winning lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming winning / winning lottery table MN11ta-A (second main gaming winning / winning lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, 1 Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, winning lottery random number), the main game symbol win / win lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, in the present embodiment, the hit (so-called small hit) that cannot shift the game state is not illustrated, but a small hit may occur (small hit is won).

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), regarding the main game symbol based on the main game symbol win / loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. However, if a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) draws the first main game variation mode determining lottery corresponding to each game state. Referring to the table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol win / loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, variation The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1415.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is configured to be determined based on the win / no win result of the main game symbol and the main game time saving flag state. That is, when the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined, and when the main game time saving flag is ON (time saving game state) It is configured so that the variation mode in which the variation time is short can be easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the table is not configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that the table may be configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls. Absent. Furthermore, the symbol variation time of the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be a relatively long time {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy to cause the second main game to be held by decreasing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous to the player. This is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be distinguished, for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

  Next, in step 1415, the game content determination means MN, the command related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information). , Variation mode information, etc.) and a command relating to the current game state (symbol variation display start instruction command) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side (control command transmission process of step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol to the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display portion B21g), in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, The process moves to step 1420.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C to change. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process moves to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1500).

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol fluctuation is finished (symbol fixed display instruction command) to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in Step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). Stop the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and display the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C to determine whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. To do. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1. Next, in a step 1458, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the hour / hour counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining hour / hour) is 0. If Yes in step 1458, in step 1460 and step 1462, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then Process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1452, step 1454, or step 1458, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1503, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1503, in step 1504, the special game control means MP30 has a specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short time flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in a step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c,
The process shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502 or step 1503, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game control process related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. . If Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the special game control means MP30 turns on the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1990, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main controller SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

  Next, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1614, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 sets the release pattern (for example, keeps opening) set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Set the opening pattern and the opening / closing pattern). Next, in a step 1618, the special game executing means MP33 clears the value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in a step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first special winning opening electric winning combination C11d (or the second special winning opening electric winning combination C21d) to cause the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening). The winning opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (especially opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start. Next, in step 1623, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the flag during the first (second) special winning opening valid period in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and shifts to step 1624. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1614, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1624 without performing the processes of steps 1616 to 1623.

Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main controller SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1625, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1625, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines the predetermined number in the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there are winning balls (for example, 10 balls). If Yes in step 1626, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1626, in step 1627, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening is reached. It is determined whether or not it has passed. If Yes at step 1627, the process moves to step 1628. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1627, the process returns to the calling source of this subroutine.

  Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). The drive is stopped to close the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) (processing related to closing is executed in the processing, but processing for actually transmitting a control command to the device) Is executed in the control command transmission processing in step 1990). Next, in step 1629, the special game execution means MP33 sets the special winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3 to the special winning opening entrance waiting time (3 seconds in this example) and starts the operation. Next, in a step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the step 1631. Even if the answer is No in Step 1625, the process proceeds to Step 1631.

  Next, in step 1631, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special winning opening entrance waiting timer, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1631, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the first (second) special winning opening valid period flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in a step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in a step 1635, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, a round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). It is determined whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds. If Yes in step 1638, in step 1640, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1642, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1644, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) indicating that the special game is to be ended in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Then, in step 1700, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 1602, step 1631 or step 1638, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the specific game control means MP50, the big hit symbol in stop is a probability variation big hit symbol (the main game symbol which becomes the probability variation game state after the special game ends, in this example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1708. On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1706 the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (100 in this example), and proceeds to step 1708. Next, in steps 1708 and 1710, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1900 processing).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, at step 2102, the maintenance control means MO executes the addition process of the counter value of the starting opening ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general ball number counter MJ13c to calculate the total ball number G. Next, in step 2104, the maintenance control means MO determines whether or not the total number of balls entered G calculated in step 2102 is a predetermined value (100 in this example) or more. If Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the maintenance control means MO calculates "starting mouth entrance number counter value / general entrance number counter value" as the entrance ratio N. Next, in step 2108, the maintenance control means MO determines whether or not the incoming ball ratio N calculated in step 2106 is within a predetermined range (in this example, 1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 2108, the maintenance control means MO displays normal display (for example, "00" is displayed) on the entry state display device J10 in step 2110, and proceeds to step 2114. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2108, the maintenance control means MO displays an abnormality display (for example, “01” is displayed) on the entry state display device J10 in step 2112, and proceeds to step 2114. Next, in step 2114, the maintenance control means MO clears the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the general ball number counter MJ13c to zero, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). On the other hand, if No in step 2104, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900). Thus, in the present embodiment, every time the total number of game balls entered in the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening P10 reaches 100, the first main The winning ball ratio N between the total of the game balls that entered the game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 and the game balls that entered the general winning opening P10 is calculated, and the entering ball ratio N becomes The display executed by the entrance state display device J10 is configured to be different depending on whether or not the range is normal (“1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4” in this example).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the fraud detection information management process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor, and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is the process executed in step (1), and it is intended to remove the influence of noise by determining whether or not it is continuously ON at a predetermined number of interrupts. The same meaning is said when the term is “predetermined number of times consecutively”). If Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the fraudulent radio wave is detected, and turns on the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. The procedure moves to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of the fraudulent radio wave has ended, and turns off the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914 the fraud detection information management means ME determines that fraudulent magnetism has been detected, turns on the fraud magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb, The procedure moves to step 1922. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1916, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the fraud detection has ended, and turns off the fraud detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

  Next, in step 1922, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns on the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , And proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1922, in step 1926, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether the input from the door opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1926, in step 1928 the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 is opened, and turns off the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , And proceeds to step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

  Next, in step 1932, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether the input from the frame opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, and turns on the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. And shifts to step 1934. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, in step 1936, the fraud detection information management unit ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1936, in step 1938 the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, and turns off the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the error management process related to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the error management means determines whether or not an error occurrence condition is satisfied (for errors that may occur and control at the time of error occurrence, refer to FIGS. 73 and 74). If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the error management unit transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the fact that an error has occurred and error type information (by the control command transmission process of step 1990). (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1956, the error management means determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied (see also FIGS. 73 and 74 for the error cancellation condition and the control at the time of error cancellation). If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the error management unit transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the information indicating that the error is released (sub-main by the control command transmission process of step 1990). (Transmitted to the control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). Even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3000).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes an anti-payout control board reception control processing described later, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 31 shows a flow chart of the payout control board transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the input port of the second line (the line that transmits the ON / OFF signal indicating whether or not the prize ball is being paid), and determines whether the payout signal is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout is currently executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb to refer to the unpaid award balls (the award ball payout command is still sent to the award ball payout control board KH side). It is determined whether or not there is a prize ball that has not been transmitted. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the flag area of the injustice related information temporary storage means MEb, and it is an error that it is unsuitable to perform the prize ball payout related error ( For example, it is determined whether or not an error related to a failure of the payout motor, a full tank full, an out-of-bulb error, etc.) have occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the payout information transmitting / receiving unit MHsj corresponds to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed, which is temporarily stored in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage unit MHb. The prize ball payout commands (see FIG. 32) corresponding to the number of paid prize ball payouts are set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. Then, in step 3125, the payout information transmitting / receiving unit MHsj deletes the unpaid award ball information corresponding to the currently set award ball payout command from the unpaid award ball information temporary storage unit MHb and shifts subsequent information. To execute. Next, in step 3130, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj transmits the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and performs the next process (the counter payout control board in step 3200). Reception control processing). In addition, also in the case of No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the processing shifts to the next processing (anti-payout control board reception control processing of step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information transmitted / received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted / received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 32. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information that the command is a prize ball payout command and information about the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed to 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000B) means that there are 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means that there are 15 prize balls. .

  Next, the payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (prize ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, details of each error content will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is “0”, it means that the error has not occurred, and if the bit is “1”, the error is generated. Is occurring. Bit 0 relates to completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 33 shows a flow chart of the payout control board reception control processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb and determines whether or not the payout related information is received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the fraud detection information management means ME includes error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and turns on the error flag related to the relevant error, thereby paying out the prize ball. The error information on the control board KH side is also managed (unified management) on the main control board M side. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in step 3220, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and sets an error flag relating to an error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Turn off. Then, in step 3225, the payout information transmitting / receiving unit MHsj determines whether or not the prize-ball payout completion information is present in the received payout-related information. If Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj clears the prize ball payout command (the prize ball payout command relating to the present payout completion) set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. Processing (processing of step 3500). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG refers to the game state temporary storage means MB to confirm the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, sends the result to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). On the external relay terminal board G, a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information regarding prize ball payout, information regarding winning or a symbol stop, current game state (normal game state, Specific game state, special game state, etc.) output terminal for game state information output, error information for outputting various error information detected by opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Output terminals and the like} are provided. As will be described later, the output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. Output terminals other than the one output terminal are terminals for outputting a signal output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a jackpot during jackpot (there are a plurality of jacks depending on the type of jackpot). ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a start opening winning time output terminal that outputs a signal when the winning opening is won, and there is not enough balls in the prize ball tank KT. While the output terminal for outputting the signal while the ball is running, the output terminal for the special symbol fixed number of times that outputs the signal when the special symbol fixed stop, etc. of the game related information that is important information for the game hall operator side It is an output terminal. That is, by using the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals of these important game related information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to send the game-related information and the payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, an outline of the information transmission system of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It does not mean that That is, an electric signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. It is once replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON / OFF) by the section, and then output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force causes the contact portion G2 to be closed, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected. Therefore, on the side of the hall computer HC, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal that is substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G by detecting the conducting period. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side to the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable the one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the goto action, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and One-way communication is also possible by a photosensor having a light receiving unit (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is possible to receive a signal by reading with a section).

  However, since the physical signal (switch state is turned on / off) is once replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC by one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complex information using the input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the special symbol determination frequency, It is customary to configure such that only the information indicating that "1 variation of the special symbol has ended" can be transmitted).

  Next, the processing on the prize-ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process to be described later with the main control board M. Next, at step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (prize ball payout start / motor drive start) described later. Next, at step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving / at the end of prize ball payout) which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven), which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a later-described motor error time process, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, with reference to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize-ball payout control board KH of the gaming machine of the present embodiment controls the transmission / reception of commands / information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. A transmission / reception control means 3100 for controlling, an error control means 3200 for controlling an error related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls upon receiving a prize ball payout command or a ball rental command. And a payout control unit 3300 that executes the payout process. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the transmission / reception control unit 3100 receives the information (for example, a command or a signal) from the main control board M or the card unit R and controls the reception control unit 3110, and transmits the information to the main control board M or the card unit R. And a transmission control unit 3120 that controls the control.

  Here, the reception control unit 3110 further includes a main-side reception control unit 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. Then, the main-side reception control means 3111 further has a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further has a payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 in which error information relating to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side is temporarily stored.

  Next, the error control means 3200 detects an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on / off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality. Error control means 3230 at the time of detection of a payout motor operation abnormality that controls error control at the time, error control means 3240 at the time of detection of a payout abnormality that controls error control at the time of detection of a payout abnormality, and error when a ball path abnormality is detected Error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality that controls the control, error control means 3260 at the time of detecting a payout motor abnormality that controls the error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. When a payout stop abnormality detecting error control means 3270 that controls the error control when the game is performed and a ball biting error of the prize ball payout unit KE10 occur A ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t that manages the error notification period, and a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs are further provided. There is. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times the payout motor operation abnormality has been detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of excessive prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes payout interval extension control means 3251 that executes time extension processing of the payout interval related to prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 for executing a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

  Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout processing. Here, the payout process related information temporary storage unit 3310 temporarily stores a payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 for temporarily storing a state related to payout (for example, whether the payout is being performed or whether a payout abnormality has occurred). During the payout process, the payout counter 3312 in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven in the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. In the meantime, the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator, and a predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation) It is paid out by a ball passing waiting timer 3315 for measuring time / motor pause time) and a unit payout operation. A unit payout counter 3317 which game balls speed is set can further have. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is an increment type timer. It is also possible to use a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the error detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. First, in step 4110, the error control unit 3200 executes a payout motor operation abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes a payout abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes a ball path abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control unit 3200 executes a payout motor abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an after-payment stop abnormality detection error control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of times of occurrence of abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality described later is detected, and to flag an error occurrence when the number of occurrence of abnormality is equal to or greater than a threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the situation that the prize ball payout control board KH side is not executing the prize ball payout process. This is a flag that is turned on when the operation is performed (discharging motor operation abnormality). If Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection time error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 increments the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 by 1. Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control unit 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. To do. If Yes in step 4114, in step 4115 the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or step 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

  Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to determine whether the payout motor operation error flag is ON. If Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets a payout motor operation error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and the next process ( The process proceeds to the payout abnormality detection error control process of step 4120). Even if No in step 4116, the process moves to the next process (error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection of step 4120).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the payout abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of payouts of excessive game balls due to the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number is equal to or more than a threshold value, This is to turn on the flag indicating that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, when the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds the predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side, and an excessive game ball payout is detected (payout) This is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). If Yes in step 4121, in step 4122 the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and stores the excess payout number in the excess payout accumulation counter 3241. to add. Next, at step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excessive payout accumulation counter 3241 and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 25). If Yes in step 4124, in step 4125 the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or step 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be eliminated only by turning on the power again, but this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the error may be eliminated by pressing the error release switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

  Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is ON. If Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 sets an overpayment error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as the payout related error information, and the next process (step 4140). The process proceeds to error control processing when a ball path abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the ball path abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to detect an abnormality in a ball path, which will be described later. (1) Abnormality in which a game ball does not exist in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball out) has occurred. Or, whether or not there is a small amount of game balls present in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball shortage) has occurred, and when an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality has been detected, , Turning on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. Further, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball out abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, a waiting time until the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to produce. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag indicates that the motor driving is normally performed when the predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operation) are completed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Under a situation where it is determined that the payout is being made, the flag is turned on when a situation in which the payout is less than the predetermined number is detected. If Yes in step 4141, in step 4142 the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for occurrence of a ball out abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, the occurrence condition of the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example of a condition in which an out-of-balls abnormality occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path immediately above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball paths are provided. There is an example in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided for each of (presence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, a condition in which a ball shortage abnormality has occurred is given. If Yes in step 4143, in step 4144 the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Incidentally, step 4141 or step 4143
Also in the case of No at Step 4, the process proceeds to Step 4151.

  Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152 the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the condition for eliminating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, there is no particular limitation on the condition for eliminating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality, and an example of the condition where the abnormality is eliminated when the occurrence condition of the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is unsatisfied Can be mentioned. If Yes in step 4152, in step 4153 the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 causes the excitation timing during normal operation (for example, 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms to be continuously excited to perform a predetermined number of payout operations at one speed) and balls. The passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of the payout motor abnormality detection of step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passage waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball becomes relatively slower than in the normal operation. After the change, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detecting the payout motor abnormality in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of payout motor abnormality detection in step 4170). Here, although the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, for example, after performing a payout operation for one sphere at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) An example can be given in which the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the sphere passage waiting time to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to turn on a flag indicating an error occurrence and detect a retry operation of the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10) when a payout motor abnormality described later is detected. It is to execute a switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as ball catching. If Yes in step 4171, in step 4172 the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, at step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets a payout motor error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error, which will be described later, and for providing a motor error elimination waiting time within the predetermined time.

Next, at step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. If Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4179. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control unit 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313. Here, the predetermined number of steps in the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example in which the number is the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms in the retry operation described later can be given. Next, at step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j) in the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control unit 3261 causes the excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, the well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and the one-step switching speed for the retry operation (for example, 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation executing flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190). To do. Even if No in step 4177 or step 4178, the processing shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of the payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the payout stop abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating an error occurrence when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to fatally affect the continuation of the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormality relating to the continuation of the prize-ball payout process is a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH, a communication abnormality between the card unit R and the prize-ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality, and the like. First, in step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is switched from off to on. If Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 sets the error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t, and starts the operation. Go to step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t to determine whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. If Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-3, the process moves to step 4192-1.

Next, at step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passage error detection flag is switched from off to on. If Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 sets the error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and starts it. The procedure moves to Step 4193-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 to determine whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. Step 4192
If Yes in step -3, in step 4192-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns off the switch non-passage error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and proceeds to step 4193-1. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-3, the process moves to step 4193-1.

  Next, in step 4193-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 causes a flag relating to an error including pressing of the error cancel switch KH3a as an error cancel condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, the payout motor error flag, the switch non-passing error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

  Next, in step 4194-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. If Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control unit 3270 turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and proceeds to step 4195-1. .. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the pay-out stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

  Next, in step 4195-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 detects a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or more). Yes, etc.) is detected. If Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the step 4196- Move to 1.

  Next, at step 4196-1, the pay-out stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality is detected. If Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns on the tray full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 transmits a tray full command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a stoppage due to payment turns off the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 transmits a pan full cancellation command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, at step 4197-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R is detected. If Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the pay-out stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns on the CR unit non-connection error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and then in step 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the CR unit non-connection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and then in step 4198. Move to -1.

  Next, at step 4198-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to refer to a part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device). Error, payout motor operation error, payout operation incomplete game ball detection, payout motor error, switch non-passage error) It is determined whether or not all flags are off.

  If Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 to check the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the tray full. It is determined whether or not all error flags of the error flag and the CR unit non-connection error flag are off. If Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). When the process is temporarily stopped, the payout operation is restarted) and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then Process (process of step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information receiving process (against the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is an information reception process from the main control board M (and a process of setting the number of prize balls paid out accordingly), and the second half of the flow is an information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, the information reception processing from the main control board M in the first half (and the setting processing of the prize ball payout number accompanied therewith) will be described first. 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize-ball paying-out flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in a driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, the motor pause time). It is a flag that is turned on when it is in the middle). In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main-side reception control means 3111 refers to the main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, at step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the prize ball payout number to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and pays out the prize ball payout. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). With the above, the process of setting the number of prize balls paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed is completed. Even if No in Steps 4205 and 4210, the process moves to the next process (Step 4225).

Next, the information transmission processing to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to determine whether or not the payout related error transmission flag is ON. To judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" is used when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. It is a flag that is turned on and turned off after the error notification is given to the main control board M side. If Yes in step 4225, in step 4230 the error control unit 3200 turns off the payout related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Then, in step 4235,
The transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout related error information set in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next processing (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process moves to the next process (step 4240).

  Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the “prize ball payout completion flag” is a flag that is turned on when the payout control means 3300 determines that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245 the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information indicating that the prize ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (start prize ball payout)・ Starting motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (prize ball payout start / motor drive start)}. This is the end of the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (prize ball payout start / motor drive start) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. Here, the process is a process at a previous stage of executing the motor driving process of the next step 4400, and the number of steps of motor driving is determined in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. This is the process of setting. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize-ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 of FIG. 42) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in steps 4310 and 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. To do.

  Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 3). In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so as to pay out the predetermined number, and then proceeds to step 432. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the prize ball payout number set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out, and the step Moving to 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the planned payout number in the current unit payout operation (that is, the payout number planned in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, at step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the excitation stator position identification counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position during the payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control unit 3300 switches the normal operation excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) related to the stepping motor operation and the normal operation one-step switching speed (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation execution flag. Here, the retry operation in-execution flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next process {step 4400 prize ball payout control process (motor drive end / prize. When the ball payout ends)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, the motor has already been driven, and therefore the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (when motor driving ends / prize ball payout end)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the award ball payout continuation flag is a case where the award ball payout operation is to be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time has elapsed ( The detailed condition will be described later). In the case of Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (motor drive end / prize ball payout end)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and determines whether or not the counter value is over 0 (that is, whether all the planned payout numbers by the current unit payout operation have been paid out. Whether or not) is determined. If Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of steps for driving the motor again is executed without receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M as a trigger. When it is determined that not all of the planned payout number in the current unit payout operation have been paid out, an abnormal occurrence that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error is detected.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of ending the motor drive / at the time of paying out the prize ball) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. Here, the process is a termination process when all the scheduled driving ends of the motors have been executed in the previous process (step 4300), or when all the scheduled prize payouts have been executed. .. Here, the motor drive end process is executed in steps 4402 to 4419, the game ball detection process is executed in steps 4420 to 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed in steps 4430 to 4462.

First, the motor drive end processing will be described. First, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to determine whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. To do. If Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 to determine whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. It is determined whether all the step numbers in the current unit payout operation set in step 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. If Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation in-execution flag is on. If Yes in step 4416, in step 4417 the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process moves to step 4418. Next, at step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the resting state of the stepping motor (in this example, the excitation output is lowered and then continuously excited to the current excitation stator position identification counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. Even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process moves to step 4420. This is the end of the motor drive end process.

  Next, the game ball detection process will be described. First, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. If Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. Even if No in step 4420, the process moves to step 4430. Here, in the present example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time a ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of game balls are detected. If so, the value corresponding to the number of entered balls may be subtracted. This is the end of the game ball detection process.

  Next, the prize ball payout end processing will be described. First, in step 4430, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. If Yes in step 4431 (that is, if the number of game balls corresponding to the payout is detected by the sensor even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the payout incomplete game ball detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, if No in step 4431, the process moves to step 4435.

Next, in step 4435 and step 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the prize ball payout flag and turn on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. If Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and based on the count value, the number of overpayments (for example, if the counter value is "-3", the number of overpayments is "3"). Is temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (during motor driving)}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the following process (the prize ball payout control process of step 4500) is performed. (When executing motor drive)}. In this example, the overpayment is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the driving of the motor related to the payout is completed. Predetermined time (for example, the game ball paid out by the drive is a payout count sensor KE10
It may be configured such that the detection of the overpayment (determination of whether or not the value of the payout counter 3312 is less than 0) can be executed when a sufficient detection standby time before the detection by s) has elapsed. (In other words, the over-payment means that an unexpected situation has occurred in which the number of game balls exceeding the number of game balls to be paid out has been paid out, and this unexpected situation is extremely unlikely to occur in design. The occurrence of means that there is a problem in one of the payout mechanisms, or that there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act was performed while the payout operation was being performed).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control unit 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 (in this example, after the payout operation is completed, a predetermined value is determined). Even if the ball passage waiting time of time has passed, if the number of game balls corresponding to the payout operation is not detected, it is determined that a switch non-passage error has occurred immediately. There is no limitation, and it may be configured to determine that the switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

  Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. On the other hand, if No in step 4447, in steps 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. The process is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 2400 (during motor drive)}.

  Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal is received from the payout count sensor KE10s. To judge. If Yes in step 4470, in step 4472 the payout control unit 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, and performs the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag which is turned on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 43) and corresponds to the predetermined step counter number. It is a flag that turns off when all the excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 in step 4510. Next, at step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments by 1) the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j) in the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, at step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excited stator position identification counter value (j) in the excited stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on the predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

  Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (out-of-step phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. If Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the presence / absence of a detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether the rotor is not rotating correctly, that is, whether a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. If Yes in step 4555, in step 4560 the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to the next processing (motor error time processing in step 4600). Even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600). If No in step 4555, in step 4565, the error control unit 3200 stores the error flag temporarily. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of motor error according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the rest state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 45, whether or not the motor is present at the predetermined rotation position is detected at a predetermined detection timing, and if the motor is not at the predetermined rotation position, a step out or the like is performed. The motor position abnormality flag is turned on. If Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, at step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control unit 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313, and shifts to the next process (error detection error control process of step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the idle state (step 4410 and step in FIG. 44). 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at abnormality detection in step 4100).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52, a control process executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10D is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 5002, the sub-main control unit SM receives an initial process (for example, receives RAM clear information from the main control board M side) based on the information received from the main control board M side. In this case, the RAM on the sub-control board S side is initialized, and when various information commands are received from the main control board M side, performance related information at the time of power interruption is set and restored, etc.) is executed. . After that, the process shifts to a loop process of repeatedly executing (e) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM.

Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of (e) in the figure, first, in step 5100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM causes a pending information management process described later. To execute. Next, in step 5400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 5500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 5600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 5700, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes an error notification execution process described later. Next, in step 5020, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side) to complete the present. The repeat processing routine ends.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (steps 5100 to 5700 and step 5020) is looped after reset.

  Further, the process of FIG. 6F is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the signal state from the STB signal line is turned on), the sub-main control unit SM sends the signal from the main control board M side in step 5004. Check the command input port (data signal line input port described above). Then, in step 5006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command sent from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing is restored.

  Next, the process of FIG. 7G is a flowchart of the process at the time of power failure at the time of receiving the power failure signal from the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, in step 5014, the sub-main control unit SM stores the game-related information stored in the RAM in the save area. Next, in step 5016, the sub-main control unit SM starts supplying standby power to the save area. Next, in step 5018, the sub-main control unit SM prohibits execution of interrupt processing and shifts to a power interruption waiting loop. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM is provided with an area where the backup power is automatically supplied even after the power is cut off (or a RAM where the backup power is automatically supplied is provided), and the game-related information is stored in the area. It may be configured to be stored in.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. First, in step 5102, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a new suspension generation command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the (hold information related to) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 causes the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b to store the drawing suspension counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, "1" is added to the second main game (up to four). Next, in step 5106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22, based on the suspension occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the suspension information (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) is drawn. It is temporarily stored in the suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 5116.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5102, in step 5108, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 5108, in step 5110, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 5112, the design pending information display control means SM22 deletes the pending information relating to the symbol variation from the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining pending information. Next, in step 5114, the sub game control means (sub main control portion) SM accesses the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5116. . Next, in step 5116, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first reserved display section SG12 and the second reserved display section SG13). The same number of holding display lamps as the figure holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5400). If the answer is No in step 5108, the process moves to step 5116.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 5400 in FIG. First, in step 5402, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 5402, in step 5404 the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5406, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n), the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). Stop design / variation mode relating to the main game design) and the design variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, with reference to the stop design of the decorative design (for example, when the stop design related to the main design design is a jackpot design) Is a flat pattern such as "7,7,7", in the case of a lost design, a random pattern such as "1.3.5"} and a variation mode {for example, a variation mode related to the main game symbol is short In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined} and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b).

  Next, in step 5408, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 5500). Transition. Even if No in step 5402, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5500).

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the packaging variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 5510. Even if No in step 5502, the process moves to step 5510.

Next, in step 5510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5510, in step 5511 the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the diagram display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 5512, in step 5514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). , And proceeds to step 5530.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5512, in step 5516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the temporary symbol display related information storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 5516, in step 5518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 5020, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Then, the process proceeds to step 5530.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5516, in step 5520, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) causes the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 5520, in step 5522, the notice effect display control unit SM24 (and the reach effect display control unit SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process of step 5020). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the flow proceeds to step 5530. Even if No in step 5520, the process proceeds to step 5530.

  Next, in step 5530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board M side main game). It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). If Yes in step 5530, in step 5532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). Be done). Next, in step 5534, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5536, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 5600). To do. Even if No in step 5510 or step 5530, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5600).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing relating to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5602, in step 5604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command is received from the main control board M side. To do. If Yes in step 5604, in step 5606, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit is the first big hit (big hit in non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state). ) Is not determined. If Yes in step 5606, the process moves to step 5610. On the other hand, if No in step 5606 (first hit), the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero-clears) the value of the number-of-consultation-counters SM23c2 in step 5608, and proceeds to step 5610.

  Next, in step 5610, the background effect display control means SM23 adds (increments) 1 to the value of the continuous play number counter SM23c2. Next, in step 5612 and step 5614, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and a big hit on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 5616. Even if No in step 5602, the process proceeds to step 5616.

  Next, in step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG, based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (game property). It may be executed as needed based on the type of jackpot, jackpot, etc.). Next, in step 5618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the number-of-apparatus-counting counter SM23c2, and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. If Yes in step 5618, in step 5620 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the jackpot being executed is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 16R jackpot, 7A.・ It is determined whether or not it is a big hit related to the 7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 5620, in step 5622, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive games during the specific game, the total number of coins obtained during the continuous game, a plurality of types are specified). A command relating to the display of the effect during the special game or the specific game, which is displayed only when the effects are all generated or the condition of one or more combinations) is set, and the process proceeds to step 5626. On the other hand, in the case of No in either step 5618 or step 5620, in step 5624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command relating to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 5626.

  With such a configuration, based on the number of consecutive hits in the big hit (not counting the first hit), it is possible to make the effect displayed during the big hit special, and also the second main game starting opening. When a big hit occurs due to a hold caused by a ball entering during the longest opening of the electric accessory B11d, even if the big hit is a first hit, since it is counted as the number of consecutive games, the second main game starting opening electric role It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of a change related to the hold occurring during the longest opening of the object B11d. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as the ending effect generation conditions, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit in the specific effect). , Etc.) may be regarded as being satisfied.

  Next, in step 5626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5626, in step 5628 the background effect display control means SM23 performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 5630, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 5700). . Even if No in step 5604 or step 5626, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5700).

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the error notification execution processing related to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. First, at step 5702, the error notification control means SM30 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not an error occurrence command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 5702, in step 5704 the error notification control means SM30 determines an error notification mode and an error notification end condition based on the error type corresponding to the received error occurrence command, and executes error notification.

  Next, in step 5706, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the error notification end condition determined in the above-described processing is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 5706, in step 5708, the error notification control unit SM30 ends the error notification related to the error satisfying the error notification end condition, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5020). Even if No in step 5702 or step 5706, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5020).

  With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is off), and The winning ratio of the main game starting opening (the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10) and the general winning opening in a state where the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) When the direction of the game nail is illegally changed by calculating and displaying it on the incoming state display device in a different display mode depending on whether it is a normal incoming rate or an abnormal incoming rate Also, when the direction of the game nail is changed due to the collision of the game ball, it can be judged by the abnormality display of the ball entry state detection device, and a more fair game machine can be secured.

(Second embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the direction of the game nail (the state of the game nail) is normal, based on the ball entry ratio between the main game starting opening and the general winning opening. The mode of determining whether or not the state is normal is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration for determining the state of the game nail different from that of the present embodiment will be referred to as the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main game board M according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2250 (second) and step 2300 (second), that is, after executing the special game control process described above in step 1600, in step 2250 (second), The control board M executes a base determination process described later. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes maintenance mode execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1900.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2509-1 (second) to step 2509-3 (second), that is, in step 2508, the total discharge confirming means MJ11-C90 causes the total discharge confirmation number counter. 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the MJ11c-90. Next, in step 2509-1 (second), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time is shortened). It is determined whether the flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2509-1 (second), in step 2509-2 (second), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is not currently executing the special game (the condition device operation flag is off. ) Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2509-2 (second), in step 2509-3 (second), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 is the normal time total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C91 {non-probability variation game state and In the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time shortening flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is displayed. 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the counter for measuring the number of detected game balls}, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Incidentally, step 2509 (second) or step 2509
Even in the case of No in -2 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). As described above, in the second embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off), and the special game is not being executed ( In the case where the condition device operation flag is OFF), when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the entry of a game ball, it is configured to add 1 to the normal time discharge confirmation number counter value.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the award ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that step 2706-1 (second) to step 2706-3 (second), step 2716-1 (second) to step 2716-3 (second), and step 2736-. It is about 1 (second) to step 2736-3 (second), that is, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH applies the count value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the first main game starting opening. The number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is added. Next, in step 2706-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time reduction flag is OFF) is determined. If Yes in step 2706-1 (second), in step 2706-2 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH is not currently executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2706-2 (second), in step 2706-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction). To measure the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time saving flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off) The counter value of the counter) is added with the prize ball payout number (three balls in this example) related to the first main game starting opening, and the process proceeds to step 2708. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2706-1 (second) or step 2706-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2708.

  In step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout amount (3) related to the second main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2716-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time reduction flag is OFF) is determined. If Yes in step 2716-1 (second), in step 2716-2 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH is not currently executing the special game (the condition device operation flag is off). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2716-2 (second), in step 2716-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 to the second main game starting opening. The number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2716-1 (second) or step 2716-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2718.

  In addition, after adding the prize ball payout number (10 balls in this example) related to the general winning a prize to the prize ball number counter value in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines in step 2736-1 (second). , It is determined whether or not the current game state is a non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time shortening flag is off). If Yes in step 2736-1 (second), in step 2736-2 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH is not currently executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2736-2 (second), in step 2736-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the counter value of the regular prize ball number counter MHc-2 is a prize related to a general winning opening. The number of balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. Even if No in step 2736-1 (second) or step 2736-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2738.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) of FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “baseball award ball count counter value / baseball total discharge confirmation count counter value × 100” as a base value. Here, the base value is an expected value of the number of prize balls paid out for 100 game balls that have been shot in a situation where a special game has not been won, that is, a prize ball payout for the number of balls that have been shot. It is a percentage of the number. In the present embodiment, the base value is calculated only in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off). Further, since all the game balls that have been fired are configured to pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, "all the game balls that have been fired = the total discharge confirmation number counter value", and the "non-probability variation game state and All game balls fired when the game is in a non-time-reduced game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time shorten flag is off), and no special game is being executed (condition device operation flag is off). = “Counter value for the total number of confirmed discharges in normal time” ”. Next, in step 2254, the maintenance mode control means MO overwrites the base value calculated in step 2252 as the current base value, temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {step 2300 (second)}. As described above, in this embodiment, the base value is calculated based on the normal time total discharge confirmation number counter value and the normal prize ball number counter value, and is updated at any time. The method of calculating the base value is not limited to this, and the base value may be calculated each time a predetermined period has elapsed (an example of such a structure will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) of FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2302, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines whether or not the door unit D18 is open (the door open flag is on). In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the firing handle D44 has detected a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the sensor detects that the firing is performed). In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2306, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the current base value temporarily stored in the process of step 2254 on the entry state display device J10, and the next process (step 1900). Process). On the other hand, if No in step 2302 or step 2304, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900). As described above, in the present embodiment, the base value is displayed on the entry state display device J10 by executing two operations, which are the opening of the door unit D18 and the predetermined operation of the firing handle D44. There is. Although the firing handle D44 is a member that can be operated by an operation from the front of the gaming machine, it is not directly connected to the main control board M and the main control board M determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 is performed. Things have become difficult. Therefore, in order to operate the maintenance mode by operating the firing handle D44 (display information relating to ball entry), the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the firing handle D44 has been operated. Need to be configured. A configuration for solving such a problem will be described later. It should be noted that there is no problem if the display conditions of the display relating to the other balls shown in the present example are the same as the display conditions of the ball entering state display device J10 illustrated in FIG.

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is off). Moreover, in the state where the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the prize of the main game starting opening (the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10) and the general winning opening By calculating the base value from the number of balls paid out and the total number of discharged balls (the number of shots), and displaying the calculated base value on the ball entering state display device, a more detailed game ball entry status can be obtained. You will be able to confirm.

Note that, in the second embodiment, the player is configured not to display the base value on the entry state display device J10, that is, to execute the maintenance mode, and perform maintenance by a simple operation. The maintenance mode may be executed, for example, the maintenance mode may be executed by operating the firing handle and the RAM clear button on the main control board M side.

  In the second embodiment, a standby demo screen (a screen displayed on the effect display device when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period, for example, when the firing handle is not operated for 5 minutes A standby demo screen will be displayed), and the maintenance mode will be displayed by operating the sub input button and entering the correct password while the password display screen is being displayed. You may comprise.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, as the display content displayed in the maintenance mode, prize number information (the number of game balls that have entered each of the various entrances) and the number of prize balls paid out may be displayed. As a specific example, the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) is configured so that a plurality of (for example, 32) dot displays can be turned on. However, the plurality of dots may be displayed to display the number-of-wins information (the number of game balls that have entered various entrances) and the number of payouts of prize balls. Further, by transmitting a command to the sub control board S side by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, when it is determined that the incoming ball ratio is abnormal), the predetermined condition is satisfied by lighting the frame decoration lamp D18-L. It may be configured to notify that the condition is satisfied, to notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied by voice from the speaker D24, and so on. The main control board M may be configured to have a maintenance mode executing flag as a flag indicating that the maintenance mode is being executed. Specifically, when the maintenance mode executing flag is off. In the main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20), while the fluctuation or stop symbol of the main game symbol is displayed, the maintenance mode executing flag is turned on. In the case of, in the main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20), the entry into the ball entrance (prize hole) targeted for prize ball payout You may comprise so that the information regarding a sphere (henceforth the information regarding a sphere) may be displayed.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the process until the base value is displayed The flow of is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) of FIG. 53 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 2308 (second variation 1), that is, when the firing handle D44 detects a predetermined operation in step 2304, in step 2308 (second variation 1), The maintenance mode control means MO sets a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub-control board S side and includes information on the current base value), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900). .. In this way, the command for starting the maintenance mode is set from the main control board M to the sub control board S. Incidentally, the maintenance mode is a general term for a configuration for displaying information relating to entry of a game ball into various entrances, such as display on the above-mentioned entry state display device J10 and an effect display device SG described later. The display is also included in maintenance mode.

Next, FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-main control unit SM according to the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is step 5750 (second variation 1) in FIG. 7E, that is, in step 5750 (second variation 1), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 will be described later. The maintenance mode display process is executed, and the process proceeds to the hold information management process of step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display processing according to the subroutine of step 5750 (second variation 1) of FIG. 59 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5752, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode start command {command set in step 2308 (second variation 1)} from the main control board M side is received. .. In the case of Yes in step 5752, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value on the effect display device SG in step 5754, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 5100). On the other hand, if No in step 5752, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5100).

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is Off), and in a state where the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off), the main game starting opening (first main game starting opening A10 and second main game starting opening B10) and general A base value is calculated on the main control board M side from the number of prize balls paid out from the winning opening and the total number of discharges (the number of shot balls), and the calculated base value is transmitted to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S By configuring the side effect display device SG to display the base value, the maintenance mode can be easily activated based on the operation of the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) on the front surface of the gaming machine.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the first modification from the second embodiment, the maintenance mode is started by operating the firing handle D44 and the door unit D18. However, as described above, the firing handle D44 is operated by the main control board. It must be configured to be detectable on the M side. Therefore, a configuration suitable for starting the maintenance mode with the current electrical configuration of the game machine is referred to as Modification 2 from the second embodiment, and the following is a modification from Modification 1 from the second embodiment. Only will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2212-4 (second variation 2) and step 2231-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2212-2, the current special game. If it is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), in step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A A command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is a command relating to the fact that a game ball has entered the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10 or the general winning opening P10) is set (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step S2), and the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Further, in step 2231-2, if the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), in step 2231-4 (second variation 2), the second main game starting opening entrance ball Judgment means MJ11-B is a start entrance ball input command (command to the sub-control board S side, the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10 or general winning opening P10 (Command relating to the effect) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 2240.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2411-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2411-2, if the special game is not currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off) In step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P is a starting entrance entrance command (a command to the side of the sub-control board S, the first main game starting opening A10, A command relating to the fact that the game ball has entered the second main game starting opening B10 or the general winning opening P10) is transmitted (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1990), and step 2420. Process shifts to.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2509-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2509-2 (second), the special game is not currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off. In case of step 2509-4 (second variation 2), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a discharge ball command (command to the sub-control board S side, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is a game ball). Is transmitted) (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section SM side in the second modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 5800 (second variation 2) and step 5900 (second variation 2) in FIG. 7E, that is, step 5800 (second variation 2), The sub-control board S executes a base determination process described later. Next, in step 5900 (second variation 2), the sub-control board S executes a maintenance mode display process, which will be described later, and shifts to the process of step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the base determination processing according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second variation 2) of FIG. 64 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5802, the sub control board S is set by the start entrance ball command (step 2212-4 (second variation 2) or step 2231-4 (second variation 2)) from the main control board M side. Command} is received. If Yes in step 5802, in step 5804, the sub-control board S, the sub-side normal award ball number counter SN10c {non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state (main game probability variation flag is off and main gaming time reduction flag is Off), and when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10 or the general winning opening P10 A counter for managing the number of balls paid out on the side of the sub-control board S, which is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S} with the counter value of the start mouth prize ball (3 balls in this example) After addition, the process moves to step 5806. On the other hand, if No in step 5802, the process proceeds to step 5806. Next, in step 5806, the sub control board S determines whether or not a general entry command {command set in step 2411-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side has been received. . If Yes in step 5806, in step 5808, the sub-control board S adds the general winning award ball number (10 balls in this example) to the counter value of the sub-side normal prize ball number SN10c, and then in step 5810. Process shifts to. On the other hand, if No in step 5806, the process moves to step 5810.

Next, in step 5810, the sub control board S determines whether or not the discharge ball command {command set in step 2509-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side is received. If Yes in step 5810, in step 5812, the sub-control board S determines the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c {non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (main gaming probability variation flag is off and main gaming time saving flag is In order to manage the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s on the side of the sub-control board S when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) The counter is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the discharge number (1) is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 5814. On the other hand, if No in step 5810, the process moves to step 5814. Next, in step 5814, the sub-control board S calculates “the sub-side normal prize ball number counter value / the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value × 100” as the base value. Next, in step 5816, the sub-control board S overwrites the calculated base value as a current base value and temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 5900 (second variation 2)}. As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the sub-control board S is configured to calculate the base value.

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5900 (second variation 2) in FIG. 64 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5902, the sub control board S determines whether or not the door unit D18 is open (the door open flag is on). If Yes in step 5902, in step 5904 the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 5904, in step 5906, the sub-control board S displays the temporarily stored current base value on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Even if No in step 5902 or step 5904, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, two operations, that is, opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub input button (for example, off → on for 0.5 seconds or less → off) are executed. As a result, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG. The sub-input button SB is connected to the sub-control board S, and is configured to be operated by an operation from the front of the gaming machine. That is, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG by opening the door unit D18 and operating from the front of the gaming machine. It should be noted that the display conditions of the display relating to the other balls shown in the present example may be the same as the display conditions of the effect display device SG illustrated in FIG.

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine of the second modification from the second embodiment, the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is Off), and in the state where the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off), the main game starting opening (first main game starting opening A10 and second main game starting opening B10) The main control board M counts the number of prize balls paid out to the general winning opening and the total number of discharges (the number of shot balls), and the counted result is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The sub-control board S is configured to calculate a base value based on the information related to the count received from the main control board M side, and display the calculated base value on the effect display device SG on the sub-control board S side. As a result, most of the processing relating to the display of the entered state of the game ball (especially the display of the base value in this example) can be executed on the side of the sub control board S, and the data capacity used by the main control board M Can be reduced. Further, even when the maintenance mode is started, the maintenance mode can be started by opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub input button SB connected to the sub control board S side. Makes it easy to start maintenance mode. In addition, when displaying the base value (or the information relating to the above-mentioned ball entry) on the effect display device SG, it is desirable to display it at a position that does not overlap with other displays. Specifically, the display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold display of the first main game side in the first hold display unit SG12, the hold display of the second main game side in the second hold display unit SG13, error It is desirable to configure such a display (such as an error that the door opening flag is turned on) and the like and the display of the base value do not overlap.

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, the calendar function using the RTC function (real-time clock, details of which will be described later) has an authentication key for each date (the authentication key differs for each date). It may be configured to display the maintenance mode when a correct input operation is performed on the sub input button.

  Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, as the input mode of the sub input button, there is a back command or a hidden command (the operation mode of the sub input button exists, but the operation mode is not notified to the player. The maintenance mode may be displayed by executing the operation mode).

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, the RTC function (real-time clock, details of which will be described later) is used to input a command only at a predetermined time (for example, perform a predetermined operation on a sub-input button). Yes) may be implemented and the maintenance mode may be displayed when a correct command is input.

  Further, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, winning information relating to which of the ball entrances and how many winning balls have been paid out is provided from the main control board M side to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S may be configured to total based on the received ball entry information, and the ball entry information may be the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, or the general winning. It may be a mouth, an auxiliary game starting mouth, an out mouth, a game ball that has passed the total discharge confirmation sensor, or the like.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the process until the base value is displayed The flow of is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as Modification 3 of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The main control chip is mounted on the main control board M. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, a built-in ROM is allocated to the space from “0000H” to “2FFFH”, a built-in RAM is allocated to the space from “F000H” to “F3FFH”, and a space from “FE00H” to “FEBFFH” is allocated to the space. Is assigned a register area (internal register area) built in each circuit in the main control chip. By causing the CPU to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to access the corresponding hardware.

  Incidentally, the built-in ROM is a first ROM area which is an area mainly controlling the progress of the game (sometimes referred to as a use area) and an area (mainly an error control) which controls a process different from the normal progress of the game. A second ROM area (which may be referred to as a used area), and a first control area allocated to a space from "0000H" to "11FAH" and from "1200H" to "1D9EH" The first data area allocated to this space is collectively referred to as the first ROM area, and the second control area allocated to the space from "2000H" to "22E4H" and "22E5H" to "2346H". The second data area allocated to the space up to “” is collectively referred to as the second ROM area. Note that the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity existing in the first ROM area and accessed by the CPU exists in the second ROM area. Configured to be larger than the amount of data accessed from).

The first ROM area stores a first control area in which a program code (an instruction code set for the CPU) is stored and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on this program code). And a first data area that is present. Although the memory map image in the first ROM area is shown in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

  The second ROM area stores a second control area in which a program code (an instruction code set for the CPU) is stored and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on this program code). The second control area has a capacity smaller than that of the first control area (in other words, the second control area is located in the second control area and is accessed by the CPU). The program code capacity is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU), and the second data area is smaller in capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity existing in the second data area and accessed by the CPU is It is smaller than the program data capacity to be accessed from the existing CPU). Further, the built-in ROM has a management area in which various settings used when operating the main control chip are stored. Although the memory map image in the second ROM area is shown in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

  The first ROM area may include a first control area (which may be referred to as a control area of the usage area) and a first data area (which may be referred to as a data area of the usage area). The area from the start address of the first control area to the end address of the first data area may be referred to as the first ROM area. Further, if the second ROM area includes a second control area (sometimes referred to as a control area outside the used area) and a second data area (sometimes referred to as a data area outside the used area) The area from the start address of the second control area to the end address of the second data area may be referred to as the second ROM area.

  Next, the built-in RAM is based on a first RAM area, which is an area (may be referred to as a usage area) for storing information mainly based on the progress of the game, and mainly based on a process different from normal progress of the game such as error-related. A second work area, which is an area for storing information (sometimes referred to as an outside of the used area), and a first work area allocated to a space from “F000H” to “F149H”; The first stack area allocated to the space from "F1D8H" to "F1FFH" is generically referred to as the first RAM area, and the second work area allocated to the space from "F210H" to "F21DH". , And the second stack area allocated to the space from "F3F2H" to "F3FFH" are collectively referred to as the second RAM area. It should be noted that the space from "F1D8H" to "F1FFH" in the first RAM area is allocated with the first stack area used when the program related to the first ROM / RAM area needs to internally save data. The second stack area used when the program related to the second ROM / RAM area needs to internally store data is allocated to the space from “F3F2H” to “F3FFH” in the second RAM area. (However, the number of bytes in each area is just an example). The first stack area may not be included in the first RAM area, and the second stack area may not be included in the second RAM area. In such a case, for example, from “F000H” The first RAM area is allocated to the space up to “F149H”, and the second RAM area is allocated to the space from “F210H” to “F21DH”. The first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area.

  The first RAM area only needs to include the first work area (which may be referred to as a working area of the used area), and the first work area to the last address of the first stack area It may be referred to as 1 RAM area. Further, the second RAM area only needs to include a second work area (which may be referred to as a work area other than the used area), and the area from the start address of the second work area to the end address of the second stack area It may be referred to as the second RAM area.

  It should be noted that there is no problem if the address that is the unused area is changed, but it is preferable to provide an unused area between (the address between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 67, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed by the CPU are: Since they are arranged in the memory map with a space (addresses are not consecutive) and an unused area is sandwiched between them, the arrangement position of both program codes can be visually recognized in the program source code or the dump list. The above can be clearly separated (the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them). Further, similarly, an unused area is provided between the first control area and the second data area, and the first control area, which is a control area related to the progress of the game, and the data area related to the progress of the game. Since the unused area is sandwiched between the first data area and the first data area, the arrangement positions of both program codes can be visually clearly separated on the program source code or the dump list. In addition, since the leading address of the first data area is “1200H”, which is a sharp number, the design can be facilitated. On the other hand, no unused area is provided between the second control area and the second data area. Since the second control area and the second data area are areas that are not related to the progress of the game and have a relatively small capacity, the placement positions of both program codes on the program source code or the dump list are set. Since prioritizing reduction of the used capacity is given priority over visually distinct division, an unused area is not provided between the second control area and the second data area.

  Here, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area (area not filled) in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is suitable (for example, the unused area is filled with 0s, the used area is written in a young address, and the like). In addition, in the first control area and the first data area, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referred to due to noise or fraudulent activity, unused data (for example, refer to a game machine with different specifications) It is preferable to configure such that there is no data to be stored or data to be used only for testing in the development stage). Further, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are packed in young addresses and used in the area (in the area). No unused area is provided (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "11FAH" are not used). Is preferred. In the present example, all the bits of the unused area are "0", and any of the areas other than the unused area is "1" (not "0"). ing).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in Modification 3 of the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1030 (second variation 3) to step 1032 (second variation 3).

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
First, the timer interrupt process is started, and after performing the processes of steps 2000 to 1600 as the process in the first ROM / RAM area, in step 1030 (second variation 3), the main control board M sets the second ROM / RAM. Executes a region processing call.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2250 (second), the main control board M executes the above-described base determination processing. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described above. Next, in step 1032 (second variation 3), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM / RAM area, and thereafter executes steps 1900 to 1990 as processing in the first ROM / RAM area. Become.

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the modification example 3 from the second embodiment provides the first ROM area and the second ROM area, and also provides the first RAM area and the second RAM area. The data used in the first ROM / RAM area of the main control board M is configured by executing the processing of calculating the base value and the processing of displaying the base value in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area. The capacity can be reduced.

(Third Embodiment)
In the present embodiment and the second embodiment, the ball entrance ratio N (starting entrance ball count counter value / general ball count counter value) or base value (the number of prize balls paid out at a predetermined ball entrance is defined as a game ball). The value obtained by dividing the value obtained by dividing the total number of fired balls by 100 is displayed as the display of the information related to the ball entry, but the display method of the display related to the ball entry is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration relating to a method of displaying information regarding entering a ball different from the present embodiment and the second embodiment will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that step 1024 (third) and step 1026 (third) in the process of FIG. 11C and step 2300 (third) of the process of FIG. Yes, that is, in FIG. 7C, in step 1024 (third), the main control board M erases the display of the entry state display device J10. Next, in step 1026 (third), the main control board M turns off the maintenance mode flag and moves to step 1020. As described above, the maintenance mode (display on the ball entering state display device J10) described later is configured to be ended by powering off. Further, in the same figure (b), after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 2300 (third), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later, and the process of step 1900 is executed. Transition.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to step 2300 (third) of FIG. 69 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2310, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. If Yes in step 2310, it is determined in step 2312 whether or not a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long pressing for 10 seconds or more) has been performed. It should be noted that, in this process, only the long press started from the power-on state is determined, and when the operation of Yes in step 1002 is executed, that is, when the power is off, the RAM clear button is pressed for a long time. When the pressing is started, the result of this processing is not Yes. That is, when the power-on switch Ea is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, the result in step 1002 is Yes, but even if the RAM clear button is continuously pressed from that state, it does not become Yes in step 2312. On the other hand, if the power-on switch Ea is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the result in Step 1002 is not Yes, and the RAM clear button is continued to be pressed (the RAM clear button is pressed and held) for the first time. , Yes in step 2312.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the maintenance mode control means MO determines the prize ball number counter MHc {each of the ball entrances (the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening to be the target of prize ball payout). B10, general entrance P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20), based on the entrance into the ball, the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on } Counter value is displayed on the incoming state display device J10. Next, in step 2316, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to the processing in step 2318. On the other hand, if No in step 2310, the process proceeds to step 2318. Next, in step 2318, the maintenance mode control means MO
Determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed. (Unlike pressing for a long time, the pressing in this processing is once when the RAM clear button is turned off → turned on for 0.5 seconds or less → turned off. Determined to have been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the maintenance mode control means MO refers to the maintenance mode display content table and displays the display content corresponding to the display number next to the currently displayed display number. It is displayed on the display device, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2312 or step 2318, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900).

  Further, the table in the upper right part of the figure is an example of a display content table during maintenance mode. In the maintenance mode display content table, display contents (counter values) corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 are set. Every time the RAM clear button is operated, "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ・The display contents on the incoming state display device J10 are switched to the display contents corresponding to "...". As a specific example of the display on the entry state display device J10, when the RAM clear button is pressed and held for 10 seconds or longer while the power is on, the entry number 1 is displayed on the entry state display device J10. Number of balls counter MHc {Each entrance for which prize balls are to be paid out (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general entrance P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning) When the RAM clear button is pressed after that, the counter value of the accumulated number calculated after the power is turned on of the number of prize balls paid out for which the determination of prize ball payout is made based on the entry into the mouth C20) is displayed. , The entrance state display device J10, the start mouth entrance number counter MJ12c which is the display content of the display number 2 (the game entered into the first main game start mouth A10 or the second main game start mouth B10 under specific circumstances Power to measure the number of balls Counter value is displayed and then the RAM clear button is pressed, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 (total discharge confirmation sensor), which is the display content of display number 3, is displayed on the incoming state display device J10. C90s The counter value of a counter for measuring the number of detected game balls) is displayed, and when the RAM clear button is pressed thereafter, the number of general balls, which is the display content of display number 4, is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. The counter value of the counter MJ13c (a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under a specific situation) will be displayed. When the RAM clear button is pressed while the general entry number counter value which is the display content of the display number 4 is displayed, the prize ball number counter value which is the display content of the display number 1 is displayed. Will be done.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the maintenance mode in which the information regarding the entry can be displayed by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on. Is configured to start, and the type of display in the maintenance mode is changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, thereby providing a gaming machine in which information relating to a plurality of types of entry can be confirmed. be able to.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, as a condition for ending the maintenance mode when the maintenance mode is being executed, power-off recovery and various ball inlets (for example, an outlet C80, an auxiliary game starting port H10, etc.) It is also possible to enter a ball into a ball entrance which is not subject to the prize ball payout. Incidentally, the condition for ending the maintenance mode may be the entry of the game ball into the specific entry opening that triggers the execution of the special game by entering the ball.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear button is being pressed, the input port of the RAM clear button is in the on state, and in such a case, the RAM clear button is held for a predetermined time (for example, It is not determined whether or not the button has been pressed (for 10 seconds or more) (Yes in step 2312), and the maintenance mode is not started. However, when the input port of the RAM clear button changes from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more), The maintenance mode is configured to be able to start execution. Whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated is determined by checking the input port of the RAM clear button multiple times at predetermined intervals, but when the power is turned on while the RAM clear button is being pressed (step (At the time of determination at 1002), the input port of the RAM clear button is checked at intervals shorter than the interval at which the interrupt processing is executed, and after the power is turned on (at the time of determination at step 2312), the interrupt processing is performed. The input port of the RAM clear button is confirmed at the execution interval.

(First modification from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the third embodiment, the entry status of the game balls into the various entrances is always counted from the power-on of the gaming machine, and the display based on the count status is used as the information regarding the entry. Although it is configured to display, the method of displaying the situation regarding entry is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration relating to a method of displaying information relating to a ball entering, which is different from those of the present embodiment to the third embodiment, is referred to as a modification example 1 from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail. I will describe.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in the first modification from the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2300 (third variation 1) in the process of FIG. 11B, that is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600 of FIG. In step 2300 (third variation 1), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process described later, and shifts to the fraud detection information management process of step 1900.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2509-4 (third variation 1) and step 2509-5 (third variation 1). That is, in step 2508, 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, and then in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 is set to It is determined whether or not the in-operation flag (a flag that is turned on when the firing handle D44 is operated) is on. If Yes in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), in step 2509-5 (third variation 1), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a total discharge maintenance counter MJ11c-C92 (increment counter, It is a counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s during the period when the firing handle D44 is operated during the maintenance mode, and is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M). 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600). With this configuration, the total discharge number maintenance counter value is added during the period in which the player operates the firing handle D44.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2706-4 (third variation 1), step 2706-5 (third variation 1), step 2716-4 (third variation 1), step 2716-5 (third variation). 1st variation, step 2736-4 (third variation 1), and step 2736-5 (third variation 1). That is, in step 2704, after adding the prize ball payout amount (three balls in this example) related to the first main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2706-4 (third variation 1) ), The prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2706-4 (third variation 1), in step 2706-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 (increment counter, maintenance mode. This is a counter that measures the number of game balls that enter the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, or the general winning opening P10 while the firing handle D44 is being operated. The prize value payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening is added to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the substrate M), and the process proceeds to step 2708. Even if No in step 2706-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2708.

  Further, in step 2714, after adding the prize ball payout number (three balls in this example) related to the second main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2716-4 (third variation 1) ), The prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2716-4 (third variation 1), in step 2716-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the second main value. The number of prize balls paid out (three balls in this example) related to the game starting opening is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718.

  In addition, in step 2734, after the number of prize balls paid out for the general winning opening P10 (10 balls in this example) is added to the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc, in step 2736-4 (third variation 1). The prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is on. If Yes in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), in step 2736-5 (third variation 1), the prize-ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize-ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the general winning opening. The number of prize balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the addition processing to the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 is performed separately from the addition processing to the prize ball counter MHc when the firing handle D44 is operated. Is configured to perform. Even if No in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2738.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2322, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the handle operation flag is off. If Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2324, in step 2326, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not there is a predetermined operation (long press for 10 seconds or more) of the RAM clear button (only long press started from the state where the power is on). Therefore, if the operation of Yes is executed in step 1002, it is not Yes in this processing). If Yes in step 2326, the maintenance mode control unit MO turns on the maintenance mode flag in step 2328, and proceeds to step 2330. On the other hand, if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been started. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the handle operation flag and shifts to the processing of step 2334. Also, in the case of No in step 2322, the processing moves to step 2334. Next, in step 2334, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 2334, in step 2336, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “baseball maintenance counter value / total discharge maintenance counter value × 100” as the base value.

Next, in step 2338, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the calculated base value on the ball entering state display device J10. Next, in step 2340, the maintenance mode control means MO turns off the handle operation flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900). Incidentally, step 2326, step 2330, or step 2334.
Also in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the operation of the firing handle D44 is set to the base value during the period in which the firing handle D44 is operated after the RAM clear button is pressed and the maintenance mode is started. It is configured to be displayed on the incoming state display device J10 at the timing when it is finished.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine of the first modification from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information on entering the ball is displayed. It is configured to start the displayable maintenance mode, and is configured to calculate and display the base value on the main control board M side during the period during which the firing handle is operated during the maintenance mode. Even if you want to confirm the base value for a predetermined period by firing a ball, you can check it by only operating the firing handle and playing a game.

  Further, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, in the case where the game ball enters any of the ball entrances within a predetermined period after the operation of the firing handle is finished and a predetermined time elapses, You may comprise so that the information which concerns on a ball may be calculated also including the number of balls. In such a case, a sensor capable of detecting that a game ball is flowing down the game area may be provided.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the base value during the period during which the firing handle is operated in the maintenance mode can be calculated and displayed, but the maintenance mode execution mode is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration, which is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from that of the first modification from the third embodiment, is referred to as a second modification from the third embodiment, and hereinafter, the modifications from the first modification from the third embodiment Only will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, the points of change from the first modification from the third embodiment are step 2341-1 (third variation 2), step 2341-2 (third variation 2), and step 234-3 (third variation 2). ). That is, when it is determined in step 2326 that the predetermined operation (long press for 10 seconds or more) of the RAM clear button has been performed, in step 2341-1 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control unit MO determines the current operation. By transmitting the command related to the game state to the sub control board S side, the sub control board S receives the command related to the current game state and the maintenance mode lighting mode table described later (main control board M side and sub control). With the board S side), the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the gaming effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current gaming state, The processing moves to step 2328.

Next, in step 2328, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Even if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Next, at step 2341-2 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (pressing in this processing means that the RAM clear button is off → 0.5 seconds or less). Is turned on → off, it is determined that the button has been pressed once). In the case of Yes in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), in step 2343-1 (third second), the maintenance mode control means MO causes the maintenance mode lighting mode table (main control board M side and sub The control board S side is assumed to have respectively), and the game state is changed to the game state corresponding to the display number next to the display number corresponding to the current game state. Next, in step 2341-4 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO transmits the command related to the current game state to the sub control board S side, so that the sub control board S receives the current With reference to the command relating to the game state and a lighting mode table during maintenance mode described later (which are provided respectively on the main control board M side and the sub control board S side), the frame decoration lamp D18-L (The game effect lamp D26 may be used) is turned on in a lighting mode corresponding to the current game state (the changed game state), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2341-2 (third modification 2), the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lighting mode table during maintenance mode. In the maintenance mode lighting mode table, game states corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 are set, and each time the RAM clear button is operated, "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ..." The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is configured to be turned on in the lighting mode corresponding to the changed gaming state. As a specific example of the game state transition, when the RAM clear button is pressed for 10 seconds or longer while the power is on, the game state corresponds to the display number 1, a non-probability variation game state and a non-time-reduced game state. (Main game probability change flag is off and main game short time flag is off), and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in red which is the lighting mode corresponding to the game state. To do. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, it is changed to a non-probability variation game state and a time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time saving flag is on), and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in the blue color. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (main game probability change flag is on and main game time shorten flag is off) are changed, and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in the green color. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is on and the main game time shortening flag is on) are changed, and in a lighting mode corresponding to the game state. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on in a certain yellow color. When the RAM clear button is pressed in the game state corresponding to the display number 4, the game state corresponding to the display number 1 is set, and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state is changed to red. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on. Thus, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the game state can be changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode. By configuring in this way, for example, the probability Fluctuating gaming state and time shortening When you want to check the base value in the gaming state, etc., change the gaming state to the probability varying gaming state and time shortening gaming state, and then operate the firing handle to change the probability variation gaming state and time shortening. The base value in the gaming state can be confirmed. In addition, by changing the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) depending on the game state, it becomes clear at a glance which game state the game is currently in, and the work of confirming the base value becomes easier. . In the modified example 2 from the third embodiment, every time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, the game state is changed, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (also as the game effect lamp D26 is used depending on the game state. However, the gaming state is not changed even if the RAM clear button is operated during the maintenance mode, but the frame decoration lamp D18 is changed due to the different gaming state. -L (may be the game effect lamp D26) lighting mode is different, that is, the gaming state may be configured to be distinguishable by the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26). . Further, the configuration for determining the game state is not limited to the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26), and for example, (1) the type of sound output from the speaker D24. , (2) Display mode by the effect display device SG, (3) Firing strength of the firing handle D44 (small strength → determined to be left-handed → non-time-reduced game state determined, large strength → right-handed It is possible to determine the gaming state by configuring such as (determination that the gaming state is present → determining that the gaming state is in a time shortened gaming state).

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine of the second modification from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information on entering the ball is displayed. It is configured to start the displayable maintenance mode, the game state is changed every time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and the frame decoration lamp (game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the changed game state. Even if you want to confirm the base value for a predetermined period in any gaming state, you can check by simply operating the firing handle and playing after changing to any gaming state. You will be able to do it.

  In addition, in the second modified example from the third embodiment, the information related to the entry according to the game state can be confirmed, but as a display of the information regarding the entry, a non-time shortened game state (non-probability variation) Display the number of winnings only in the game state and non-time-reduced game state, and the probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state, or in the time-reduced game state (non-probability-varied game state and time-reduced game state, and The winning number may be displayed only in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state).

  Further, in the second modified example from the third embodiment, as the display of the information relating to the ball entry, the number of game balls entered into the starting opening, the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening, and the total prize ball payout amount ( Cumulative number of prize balls paid out), number of prize balls paid out in non-probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state (or accumulated prize ball number paid out), number of prize balls paid out in time-reduced game state (or accumulated prize) Either the number of balls paid out) can be displayed in the maintenance mode. Further, the special winning opening may be opened even during the maintenance mode (the big winning may be won or the big winning may be forcibly made).

(Modification 3 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the effect display device on the sub-control board S side is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode in the maintenance mode, but the maintenance mode execution mode is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration which is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a third modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 2300 (third variation 3) in the processing of FIG. That is, in the same figure (b), after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 2300 (third variation 3), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later, and step 1900. Perform the fraud detection information management process.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the third modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2215-5 (third modification 3), step 2212-6 (third modification 3), step 2231-5 (third modification 3), and step 2231-6 ( The third change is 3). That is, in step 2210, after the first main game start opening detection continuation flag is turned on, in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the first main game start opening entrance determination unit MJ11-A operates the steering wheel. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), in step 2212-6 (third variation 3), the first main game starting entrance determining means MJ11-A sets the starting entrance number counter MJ12c. One is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2222. On the other hand, if No in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Further, after turning on the second main game starting opening detection continuation flag in step 2230, in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), the second main game starting opening entrance determining unit MJ11-B is in the process of operating the steering wheel. It is determined whether the flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), in step 2231-6 (third variation 3), the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B sets the starting entrance number counter MJ12c. One is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2240. On the other hand, if No in Step 2231-5 (Third Variation 3), the process proceeds to Step 2240. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls that have entered the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 when the player is operating the firing handle D44. Becomes

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2411-5 (third variation 3) and step 2411-6 (third variation 3). That is, in step 2410, the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the general winning opening detection means MJ11-P determines whether the handle operating flag is on. To determine. In the case of Yes in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), in step 2411-6 (third variation 3), the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P sets the counter value of the general entry number counter MJ13c to 1 Is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, if No in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the third modification from the third embodiment. A change point from the first modification from the third embodiment is step 2100 (third modification 3), that is, when the operation of the firing handle D44 is completed in step 2334, step 2100 (third modification 3). ), The number-of-entered-balls determination process described later is executed, and in step 2340, the handle operating flag is turned off.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 (third variation 3) of FIG. 79 in the third modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2116, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “starting entrance ball count counter value / general ball count counter value” as the ball entrance ratio N. Next, in step 2118, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the incoming ball ratio N is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the maintenance mode control means MO transmits a command with a normal incoming ball ratio to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S causes the frame decoration lamp D18-L (game). The effect lamp D26 may be lit in the normal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2118, in step 2122, the maintenance mode control means MO sends a command with an abnormal incoming ball ratio to the sub-control board S, so that the sub-control board S causes the frame decoration lamp D18-L. The (game effect lamp D26) may be turned on in the abnormal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. Next, at step 2124, the maintenance mode control means MO clears the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general ball number counter MJ13c to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2340). Transition. It should be noted that the processing of step 2124 may be omitted, and the ball entrance ratio may be calculated based on the cumulative start opening ball entrance counter value and the general entrance ball counter value obtained by operating the firing handle a plurality of times. .

With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the modification example 3 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information regarding the entry is displayed. The maintenance mode that can be displayed is configured to start, and in the maintenance mode, it is determined whether the winning ratio between the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is normal or abnormal (as a game effect lamp D26). It is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entry status (game nail status) is normal with a simpler display.

  In addition, in the third modification from the third embodiment, the cumulative number of balls entered from the maintenance mode start to the end may be notified by means other than the effect display device, for example, when the power is on. It may be configured to start counting the total winning number from the timing when the long press of the RAM clear button is detected and the maintenance mode is started, and determine whether or not the total winning number exceeds the threshold to notify. Note that, as the notification mode, the notification may be performed in the lighting mode of the gaming machine frame as described above, or may be configured to be notified by voice from the speaker. With such a configuration, even in a pachinko gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal such as the second-class pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to notify the information regarding the entry by the lighting mode of the lamp or the voice.

(Modification 4 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the effect display device on the sub-control board S side is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode in the maintenance mode, but the execution mode of executing the maintenance mode on the sub-control board S is It is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration which is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as Modification 4 of the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2212-4 (third variation 4) and step 2231-4 (third variation 4). That is, in step 2210, after the first main game start opening detection continuation flag is turned on, in step 2212-4 (third variation 4), the first main game start opening entrance determination means MJ11-A sets the start opening. A ball entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2222. In addition, in step 2230, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag, and in step 2231-4 (third variation 4), the second main game. The starting-port entrance determining means MJ11-B sets a starting-port entrance command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to the process of step 2240.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 2411-4 (third variation 4). That is, in step 2410, after the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, in step 2411-4 (third variation 4), the general winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-P determines whether the general winning command (sub-control board). Command to the S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2509-4 (third variation 4). That is, in step 2508, after adding 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, in step 2509-4 (third variation 4), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 outputs the discharge ball command ( The command to the side of the sub-control board S) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 4) in FIG. 69 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2342, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. If Yes in step 2342, in step 2343, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long press for 10 seconds or more) (only long press started from a power-on state). If the operation is Yes in step 1002, it is not Yes in this process). In the case of Yes in step 2343, in step 2344, the maintenance mode control unit MO causes the maintenance mode start command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command for starting execution of the maintenance mode on the side of the sub control board S). ) Is set. Next, in step 2345, the maintenance mode control unit MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900). Even if No in step 2342 or step 2343, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 85 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control section SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. First, the change from this embodiment is step 5900 (third variation 4) in FIG. That is, in step 5900 (third variation 4), the sub-control board S executes the maintenance mode execution processing, and shifts to the base determination processing in step 5800 (second variation 2).

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5900 (third fourth) of FIG. 85 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 5908, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the inside of the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and determines whether or not the maintenance mode display flag is off. If Yes in step 5908, in step 5910, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the maintenance mode start command from the main control board M side is received. . In the case of Yes in step 5910, in step 5912, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the maintenance mode display flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b. Next, in step 5914, a display indicating that the maintenance mode is set is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the process proceeds to step 5916. In the case where the display indicating that the maintenance mode is being performed on the effect display device SG, the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the first main display side SG12 hold display on the first main game side, The second hold display section SG13 is configured so that the hold display on the second main game side, the display related to the error (such as an error that the door opening flag is turned on), and the display indicating that the maintenance mode does not overlap. Is desirable. On the other hand, if No in step 5908, the process moves to step 5916. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is included in the sub-control board S, and on the side of the sub-control board S, control information for starting the maintenance mode and information relating to a ball used in the maintenance mode are provided. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is configured to execute the calculation processing and the like. The maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b is included in the sub-control board S and temporarily stores information to be executed by the maintenance mode display control means SM32.

Next, in step 5916, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the inside of the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and the base measurement flag (a flag that is turned on during the measurement of the base value). Is determined to be off. If Yes in step 5916, in step 5918 the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been pressed. If Yes in step 5918, in step 5920, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 is a base measurement timer SM32t (a timer for measuring the period during which the base value is measured, and is stored in the RAM area on the side of the sub control board S). (Stored) is reset and started, and the timer value is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 5922, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the base measurement flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to step 5924. On the other hand, if No in step 5916, the process moves to step 5924.

  Next, in step 5924, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been pressed. If Yes in step 5924, in step 5926 the maintenance mode display control means SM32 stops the base measurement timer SM32t and displays the timer value on the effect display device SG. Incidentally, when displaying the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t on the effect display device SG, the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the first main game side hold display in the first hold display section SG12, 2 Hold display on the second main game side in the hold display unit SG13, display relating to an error (such as an error that the door opening flag is turned on), and the like, and the display of the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t do not overlap. It is desirable to configure. Next, at step 5928, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the present base value (the base value during the period during which the base measurement flag is on and the base value calculated at step 5816 of FIG. 87). It is displayed on the device SG. Next, in step 5930, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the base measurement flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and shifts to the processing of step 5932. Even if No in Step 5918 or Step 5924, the process proceeds to Step 5932.

  Next, in step 5932, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode has ended (as described above, the maintenance mode ends due to the occurrence of power failure). If Yes in step 5932, in step 5934, the display regarding the maintenance mode on the effect display device SG is erased. Next, in step 5936, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the maintenance mode display flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. Even if No in step 5910 or step 5932, the process proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. In the present example, the maintenance mode is configured to end when the power is turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the maintenance mode may be configured to end by a predetermined operation on the sub input button SB, a predetermined operation on the RAM clear button, or the like. Good.

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second second) of FIG. 85 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The difference from the second modification from the second embodiment is step 5818 (third modification 4). That is, in step 5818 (third variation 4), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the base measurement flag is on. If Yes in step 5818 (third variation 4), the process moves to step 5802. On the other hand, if No in step 5818 (third variation 4), the process moves to the next process (process in step 5100). With this configuration, in the fourth modification from the third embodiment, the base value is calculated only during the period when the base measurement flag is on.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the modification example 4 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information regarding the entry is displayed. The maintenance mode that can be displayed is configured to be started on the side of the sub-control board S. During the maintenance mode, the measurement of the base value is started by pressing the sub-input button, and the sub-input button is pressed again. By terminating the measurement of the base value and displaying the measured base value, it is possible to confirm the base value for an arbitrary predetermined period by executing a simple operation on the sub-control board S side. Become.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the state of entering the ball can be confirmed by displaying the information regarding the entering of the ball on the incoming state display device on the main control board M side. Is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration, which is a confirmation mode of the entering situation different from that of the present embodiment, is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3503 (fourth). That is, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG, the prize ball number counter MHc {each of the ball entrances (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general entrance for which prize balls are to be paid out) The counter value of the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on of the prize ball payout number for which the prize ball payout has been determined based on the entrance into the ball entrance P10, the first prize hole C10, and the second prize hole C20). , A counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c (a counter that measures the number of game balls entering the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 under a specific situation), the total discharge confirmation number counter A counter value of MJ11c-C90 (a counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s), and a general-payment-counter counter MJ13c (the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under specific circumstances) Signal related to the counter value of the counter to be measured (in the fourth embodiment, in the RAM area of the treatment of the main control board M, the prize ball number counter value, the starting entrance ball number counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, And the general ball count counter value) are output from the external terminal, and the process proceeds to step 3504.

  In the fourth embodiment, if the counter value of each of the prize ball number counter MHc, the start entrance ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general ball number counter MJ13c is incremented by 1, It may be configured to output a signal (it is preferable to apply the configuration to the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the general ball number counter MJ13c, which are counters whose counter values tend to be relatively small values). is there). In addition, when the count value of each of the prize ball number counter MHc, the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general ball number counter MJ13c is increased by 10, one signal is output. Alternatively, the configuration may be applied to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 and the prize ball number counter MHc, which are counters that tend to have relatively large counter values. Further, in the case where it is configured to output signals relating to the prize ball number counter MHc, the starting opening ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general ball number counter MJ13c as output information from the external terminal May output a signal (external terminal signal) from a different external terminal for each counter. With such a configuration, even when an external terminal signal that can output only on / off is used, it is possible to distinguish which counter the output information is related to. Further, the external terminal signal may be output only when the maintenance mode flag is ON (in the maintenance mode).

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, as the output information from the external terminal, the prize ball number counter value, the starting entrance ball number counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, Also, the general incoming ball number counter value can be output, and the information regarding incoming balls can be confirmed from outside the gaming machine.

As a method of confirming the information regarding entering the ball outside the gaming machine, a collating machine may be used for confirmation. Specifically, a terminal for connecting the collating machine is provided on the main control board M side. Then, by connecting the collator to the terminal, a serial signal from the main control board M side to the collator side (similar to the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the type of information and the information It may be configured to output a signal that clearly indicates the content). The serial signal may be output by the main control board M at all times, or may be output when the collation device issues an output request for information regarding entry.

  Further, as another mode for confirming the information regarding the incoming ball with the collator, the sub-control board S side is configured to manage the information regarding the incoming ball, and the sub-control board S side provides the information regarding the incoming ball. May be converted into a QR code and displayed on the effect display device SG, and the QR code may be photographed and decoded by the collation device so that the information regarding the ball entry can be confirmed by the collation device.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, various modes for confirming the information regarding the entry are described in detail, but the information regarding the entry is configured to be able to be stored for several days. Good. Therefore, a configuration capable of storing the information about entering a ball for several days is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 89 is an electrical overall configuration diagram in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps the current time by a built-in power supply. Is what you are doing. Here, the real-time clock RTC is a mechanism that is provided on the substrate of the sub-main control unit SM and that measures time. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) that is independent of the board, and keeps timing even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, so the date and time set at the time of factory shipment etc. It is possible to supply the current date and time based on the.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the fifth embodiment. A change point from the first modification from the third embodiment is step 2650 (fifth). That is, in step 3000, the main control board M executes the prize-ball payout command transmission control processing, and in step 2650 (fifth), the main control board M executes the backup execution control processing, and the step outside of 1990. Shift to signal output processing.

  Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the backup execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (fifth) of FIG. 90 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2652, the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (10000) (the total discharge confirmation counter value is cleared to zero by powering off). Therefore, the total discharge confirmation number counter value that has been measured after the power is turned on, that is, the base value is not stored if the number of game ball firings has not reached 10,000 balls). If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654 the main control board M determines whether the date has been newly changed. If Yes in step 2654, the main control board M sets the next storage area in step 2656, and proceeds to step 2658. Even if No in step 2654, the process proceeds to step 2658. Next, in step 2658, the main control board M updates and stores the current base value in the set storage area number (updated and stored until the final power-off of today, the final power-off is performed. The hour data is stored for 3 days), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990). On the other hand, if No in step 2652, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1990).

The lower part of the figure is a base value storage image diagram. Specifically, it has "1", "2", and "3" as storage area numbers, and in the table on the left side, "3" as storage area numbers. Is set. The base value of March 25 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1”, and the base value of March 27 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “2”. The base value of March 28 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “3”. After that, the number of game balls on March 29 the next day (the number of game balls that is almost the same as the number of discharged balls) was 10,000 balls or more, and the date was changed from March 28. , The storage area number changes from “3” to “1” (“1” is set), and the base value (33) of March 29 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1”. Become. The storage area numbers are configured to be set in the order of “1 → 2 → 3 → 1 ...”. Further, the base value of March 25 stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "1" will be erased (overwritten). Note that the configuration for backing up information related to the ball entry such as the base value is not limited to this, and for example, the next storage area number may be set each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on. . Further, it may be configured to have a counter for managing the storage area to be backed up, and to add 1 to the counter value of the counter each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the base value is updated and stored at any time on a business day when the total number of discharged balls is 10,000 balls or more. It is possible to store information for three days on the business day when the launch of (10,000 balls or more) is executed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the RTC is used, but with such a configuration, it is possible to easily determine how many game balls are shot at what time.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the backup is executed on condition that the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (10,000 balls in this example). It may be configured so that the information is backed up, and there is no problem even if the predetermined condition is changed. For example, a predetermined time may have elapsed as a period during which a game is being executed, a predetermined number or more of game balls have been shot, the total number of prize balls paid out has reached a predetermined number, and the like. Further, the backed up information may be deleted when a predetermined period of time has elapsed or a predetermined operation is performed. Specifically, the predetermined operation for deleting the backed up information may be configured to delete the backed up information when the power is turned off, or to delete the backed up information when the power is restored.
(Sixth Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the configuration in which the process of calculating the information regarding the ball entry is executed by either the main control board M or the sub-control board S is described in detail. The information relating to ball entry may be calculated in any processing of the control board M and the sub-control board S. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2750 (sixth). That is, after executing the number of entered balls determination process in step 2100, in step 2750 (sixth), the main control board M executes the main game discharge number confirmation process, and shifts to the fraud detection information management process of step 1900. ..

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game starting mouth entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 2212-3, step 2212-5 (sixth), step 2231-3, and step 2231-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the first main game starting mouth detection continuation flag in step 2210, in step 2212-3, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A determines the counter of the starting entrance entering number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the value. Next, in step 2212-5 (sixth), the first main game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-A sets a starting opening entrance command (command to the sub control board S side), and in step 2222 Move to processing.

  In addition, after turning on the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag in step 2230, in step 2231-3, the second main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-B sets the starting entrance entering number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the counter value. Next, in step 2231-5 (sixth), the second main game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-B sets a starting opening entrance command (command to the sub control board S side), and in step 2240 Move to processing.

  Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 2411-3 and step 2411-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the general prize-winning mouth detection continuation flag in step 2410, in step 2411-3, the general prize-winning entrance determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general prize number counter MJ13c. Next, in step 2411-5 (sixth), the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P sets a general entry command (command to the sub-control board S side), and shifts to the processing in step 2420. .

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2509-5 (sixth). That is, in step 2508, 1 is added to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, and then in step 2509-5 (sixth), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 determines the discharge ball command (sub-control board). Command to the S side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2104 (sixth), that is, after calculating the total number of incoming balls G in step 2102, the maintenance mode control means MO in step 2104 (sixth) sets the total number of incoming balls. It is determined whether the number of balls G has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (6000 in this example). If Yes in step 2104 (sixth), the entry ratio N is calculated in step 2106, and if No in step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (sixth)}. With this configuration, each time the total number of balls entered into the starting opening and the general winning opening reaches a multiple of 6000 balls, an indication as to whether or not the entering ratio is within a predetermined range Can be executed.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the main game discharge number confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (sixth) of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2752, the maintenance mode control means MO determines that the counter value of the total ejection confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is a confirmation value (the total ejection number measured on the main control board M side and the total ejection number calculated on the sub control board S side). It is a counter value that is used to confirm whether the number is the same, and in this example, it is determined whether a multiple of 6000) has been reached. If Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the maintenance mode control unit MO causes the total discharge ball confirmation command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which includes information on the total discharge confirmation number counter value). Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2752, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900).

Next, FIG. 98 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 5850 (sixth), step 5950 (sixth), and step 6050 (sixth) in FIG. That is, in step 5850 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes a sub-game entering ball confirmation process described later. Next, in step 5950 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes a sub-game incoming ball number determination process described later. Next, in step 6050 (sixth), the sub control board S executes a sub game side discharge number confirmation process, which will be described later, and shifts to the hold information management process in step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the secondary game entry ball confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 5850 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5852, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the start entrance ball entering command from the main control board M side is received. In the case of Yes in step 5852, in step 5854, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 causes the sub-side starting opening entrance number counter SJ11c (from the main control board M side to the first main game starting opening A10 under specific circumstances). It is a counter that executes addition processing based on the information relating to the number of game balls that have entered the second main game starting opening B10, and is incremented by 1 to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S). , And proceeds to the processing of step 5856. On the other hand, if No in step 5852, the process moves to step 5856. Next, at step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the general entry command from the main control board M side is received. In the case of Yes in step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 relates to the sub-side general winning ball number counter SJ13c (from the main control board M side, to the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening P10 under a specific situation). The counter is a counter that executes addition processing based on the information, and is incremented by 1 to the counter value stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the process proceeds to step 5860. On the other hand, also in the case of step 5856 No, the process moves to step 5860.

  Next, in step 5860, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the discharge ball command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 5860, in step 5862, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c (from the main control board M side, based on the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). This is a counter that executes addition processing, and adds 1 to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 5950 (sixth)}. On the other hand, if No in step 5860, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 5950 (sixth)}. With this configuration, when the starting opening ball entering command, the general entering ball command, and the discharging ball command from the main control board M side are received, the starting opening on the side of the sub control board S (first main game) It is possible to perform addition processing on the counter values of the starting opening A10, the counter for entering the second main game starting opening B10), the counter for entering the general winning opening P, and the counter for discharging balls. It will be possible.

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the secondary game entry ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 5950 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5952, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 executes an addition process of the counter value of the sub-side starting opening entrance number counter SJ11c and the counter value of the sub-side general entrance number counter SJ13c to obtain the total number of entered balls. Calculate GS. Next, in step 5954, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the total number of entered balls GS has reached a multiple of the predetermined value (1500). In the case of Yes in step 5954, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 calculates (sub-side starting opening entrance number-of-balls counter value / sub-side general entrance number-of-balls counter value) as the entry ratio NS in step 5956. Although the details will be described later, the total number of balls G on the side of the main control board M is determined every 6000 balls, whereas the total number of balls GS on the side of the sub control board S is every 1500 balls. The sub-control board S side is configured so that the determination interval is shorter (the number of determinations is greater).

Next, in step 5958, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the incoming ball ratio NS is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). Yes at step 5958
In this case, in step 5960, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a normal display (for example, a small ◯ is displayed in the lower right of the display area, nothing is displayed, etc.) on the effect display device SG, and the next process is performed. The process moves to {process of step 6050 (sixth)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5958, in step 5962, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays an abnormal display (for example, a small x is displayed in the lower right of the display area) on the effect display device SG, and the next process is performed. The process proceeds to {process of step 6050 (sixth)}. Also, in the case of No in step 5954, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6050 (sixth)}.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the secondary game side discharge number confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 6050 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 6052, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation command from the main control board M side is received. If Yes in step 6052, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines in step 6054 whether or not “total discharge confirmation count counter value = sub-side total discharge confirmation count counter value”. In the case of Yes in step 6054, in step 6056, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a discharge normal display on the effect display device, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6054, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the discharge abnormality display on the effect display device SG in step 6058, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5100). Even if No in step 6052, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5100). Thus, in the sixth embodiment, every time 6000 balls are detected on the main control board M side, the detection on the main control board M side and the detection on the sub control board S side coincide. Is configured to check if That is, the main control board M side and the sub control board S side are configured to independently measure the discharged balls.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the sub-control board S respectively execute the process of calculating the information regarding the incoming ball, and the total number of discharges is Every time a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example) is reached, the sub discharge is calculated based on the total discharge number measured by the main control board M and the information transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. By confirming whether or not the total number of discharged balls calculated on the control board S side matches, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information regarding the incoming ball is correct information. In addition, since the free space of the data capacity used by the sub control board S is larger than that of the main control board M, in the processing on the main control board M side, the information regarding the incoming ball is updated every 6000 balls. The processing on the side of the sub-control board S is configured to update the information on the incoming ball for every 1500 balls, which is smaller than that on the side of the main control board M, and it is possible to check the information on the incoming ball more finely. ..

  In addition, the main control board M side has a configuration in which the main control board M and the sub-control board S confirm the information regarding the incoming ball every time the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example). It may be configured to determine whether or not the total discharge confirmation number counter value and the total incoming ball number GS on the sub-control board S side match. With such a configuration, in order to prevent the information (for example, information in which the ball entry ratio N is in an abnormal range) relating to an illegal ball entry due to an illegally changing the direction of the game nail from being discovered, In the case where the rod-shaped member is put in and taken out near the general winning opening entrance detecting device P11s and the general winning entrance detecting device P11s repeats “OFF → ON”, from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. By sending a general entry command, which is information indicating that there is a entry into the general winning opening P10, the total entry number GS on the sub-control board S side is added, but the main control On the board M side, since the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has not detected the game ball, the information regarding the total discharge number on the main control board M side (total discharge confirmation number counter value) is not added, and the stick-shaped Parts When out around 般入 Prize port ball entrance detecting device P11s becomes the total emission number of main control board M side and the total inlet ball number of the sub-control board S side fraud is discovered to not match.

(Seventh embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, various configurations for confirming the information relating to the ball entry are described in detail. If it is confirmed that there is a possibility that the RAM information is erased by executing the RAM clear without storing the abnormal information. Therefore, a configuration capable of taking measures against such a situation will be referred to as the seventh embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 102 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control section SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 6100 (seventh) in FIG. That is, after executing the error notification execution processing in step 5700, in step 6100 (seventh), the sub-control board S executes RAM clear backup processing, which will be described later, and shifts to processing in step 5020.

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the RAM clear backup process according to the subroutine of step 6100 (seventh) of FIG. 102 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 6102, the sub control board S determines whether or not the RAM clear information is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the sub-main control unit SM adds 1 to the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc, stores the counter value, and performs the next process (process of step 5020). Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 6102, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5020). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the sub-control board S side is configured to store the number of times RAM clear is executed. Incidentally, in the area for storing the counter value of the RAM clear number counter SRc in step 6104, no matter what artificial operation occurs (power switch Ea or RAM clear button is operated to generate power off or RAM clear). It is configured so as to become a region that is not erased (for example, a ferroelectric memory or the like).

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is configured such that the number of times RAM clear is executed is stored on the side of the sub-control board S, so that information relating to abnormal ball entry can be obtained. When it is confirmed that the abnormal information is erased by executing the RAM clear without storing the information, the sub control board S side stores the RAM clear execution count and also executes the RAM clear. Even if the RAM clear execution count is not erased, it is possible to prevent unauthorized information operations from being executed.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of RAM clears stored in the sub-control board S may be displayed on the effect display device SG during execution of the maintenance mode. In this case, if the number of RAM clears to be displayed exceeds the predetermined number, it is determined that the illegal RAM clear is being executed, and the display of the effect or the like cannot be displayed on the effect display device SG. (It becomes impossible to use at the time of business because all the displays related to the normal game progress cannot be displayed). Further, the RTC described above may be used to store not only the number of times RAM is cleared but also the date and time when RAM is cleared.

(Eighth Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the information relating to the ball entering is calculated by the main control board M and displayed on the main control board M based on the calculated information is described in detail. The configuration in which the main control board M executes all information calculation and display processing is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the present embodiment as a configuration in which the calculation and display processing of the information regarding the ball entry is all executed by the main control board M is referred to as an eighth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described below. , Will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 104 is an example of a diagram showing a structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the entry state display device J10 is provided on the main control board M. The incoming state display device J10 has four-digit, seven-segment displays aligned and attached in a "two-digit + two-digit" format. It is configured to be displayable. The entry state display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the rear side of the game machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key possessed by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check them.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the eighth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1034 (eighth), step 2850 (eighth), and step 1036 (eighth). That is, after executing the processing of steps 2000 to 1600 as the processing in the first ROM / RAM area, in step 1034 (eighth), the main control board M calls the processing of the second ROM / RAM area.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2850 (eighth), the main control board M executes a later-described ball entry state calculation process which is a process in the second ROM / RAM area. Next, in step 1036 (eighth), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM / RAM area, and thereafter, the processing of steps 1900 to 1990 is executed as the processing in the first ROM / RAM area. It will be.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the award ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 2706-6 (eighth), step 2716-6 (eighth), step 2731 (eighth), and step 2736-6 (eighth). That is, in step 2704, the prize-ball payout determination means MH adds the prize-ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize-ball number counter MHc, and then the step 2706. In -6 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH enters the non-incident object counter value MHc-4 (the first main game starting opening A10 where the electric accessory is not provided and the general winning opening P10). This is a counter for measuring the number of game balls played, which is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) and adds the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening. Then, the process proceeds to step 2708.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Further, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then in step 2716. -6 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH, the counter counter value MHc-5 (a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the second main game starting opening B20 where the electric accessory is provided) Is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) and the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2718. To do. In step 2728, the award ball payout determination means MH temporarily stores, in the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb, information indicating that the award balls related to the first (second) special winning opening will be paid out. In step 2731 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered in the continuous winning object counter value MHc-6 (the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20). Is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side), and the number of prize balls paid out (13 in this example) related to the first (second) special winning opening is added to the processing of step 2732. Transition.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Further, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout number (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then, in step 2736-6 ( In 8th), the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout number (10 in this example) related to the general winning a prize to the counter value of the non-accompanied object counter value MHc-4, and performs the processing of step 2738. Transition. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio described later. In addition, the prize ratio is the number of prize balls paid out by the large prize hole for all the prize ball payouts and the prize by the prize hole (in this example, the second main game starting hole B10) in which an ordinary electric prize is provided. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out, and in this example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20), and the general winning opening P10. The total number of prize balls paid out is the ratio of the total number of prize balls paid out of the second main game starting opening B10 and the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20). Further, the continuous winning role ratio is a ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening to the total number of prize balls paid out, and in the present example, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10. And the number of prize balls paid out of the first prize hole C10 (second prize hole C20) is greater than the total number of prize balls paid out of the first prize hole C10 (second prize hole C20) and the general prize port P10. It has become a percentage. Strictly speaking, the continuous accessory ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening when the condition device operation flag is on to all the prize ball payouts. When calculating the continuous accessory ratio, two ring buffers for storing the number of prize balls paid out of the special winning opening are provided, and one of the ring buffers has the condition device operation flag turned on. The number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening (the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit) is memorized, and the number of prize balls paid out by the big winning opening when the condition device operation flag is off (by the small hit) is stored in the other ring buffer. The continuous winning character ratio may be calculated (stored) by storing the number of prize balls paid out.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the present embodiment is a non-stochastic variation game state and a non-time shortened game state (main game probability variation flag is off and main game time saving flag is off), and during execution of a special game. If the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball in the absence (conditional device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation number counter value is incremented by 1, so that the total discharge is achieved regardless of the game state or the like. When the confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball, it is configured to add 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter value. Since the processing is only deleted from the present embodiment, detailed description will be omitted.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a ball entry state calculation process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (eighth) of FIG. 105 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 2852, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1000 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines, as the character ratio, "(character part counter value + continuous character part counter value) / (character part counter value + continuous character part counter value + non-character). The accessory counter value) × 100 ”is calculated. Next, in step 2856, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “continuous accessory role counter value / (feature object counter value + continuous accessory role counter value + non-effects counter value) × 100” as the continuous accessory rate. To do. Next, in step 2858, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated in step 2854 and step 2856 on the incoming state display device J10, and the next process {step 1036 (second). 8)}. Even if No in step 2852, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1036 (eighth)}. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated each time the number of discharged balls becomes a multiple of 1000 balls, and the calculated character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed on the ball entering state display device J10 in a display mode described later. It is configured as follows. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated in step 2854 and step 2856 are configured to be displayed on the incoming state display device J10. Since the result of calculating the character ratio or continuous character ratio is rarely an integer, the result of calculating the character ratio or continuous character ratio is rounded down to the nearest whole number. A digit integer may be displayed on the entering state display device J10.

  Next, FIG. 109 is a ball entry information backup image diagram in the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment may be configured to store (backup) the information regarding the ball entry each time a predetermined number of game balls are shot, as in the fifth embodiment described above. An example of such a configuration is shown in the same figure. In the figure, each time the number of discharged balls becomes 6000, in other words, every time the total discharge confirmation number counter value becomes a multiple of 6000, it is configured to store the information on the entered balls. In addition, since the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 is configured to be able to measure when all the game balls that have been ejected are discharged, when the total discharge confirmation number counter value becomes a multiple of 6000 balls. Can be regarded as a game ball being fired at a multiple of 6000 balls. In addition, if it is a general pachinko game machine, the number of game balls that is approximately the same as the number of game balls that have been shot is paid out as the cumulative number of prize balls paid out, that is, the number of game balls that is approximately 100% of the number of game balls that have been shot. Is configured to be paid out as the total number of prize balls paid out, and thus the total number of shot balls can be considered to be substantially the same as the total number of prize balls paid out. In addition, in a gaming machine configured such that about 90% of the number of game balls shot is paid out as the total number of prize ball payouts, by setting “total number of prize ball payouts × 100/90” It is possible to calculate the approximate number of game balls shot.

  In addition, as the information relating to the incoming ball stored for every 6000 balls, the total number of prize balls paid out based on the incoming into the general winning opening P10, the award based on entering into the first main game starting opening A10 Cumulative total of the number of balls paid out, cumulative total of the number of prize balls paid out based on entering the second main game starting opening B10 (where the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is provided), the first large winning opening C10 and There is a cumulative total of the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball thrown into the second special winning opening C20, the total number of prize balls paid out of the above four items, and the above information is 2 each time the number of discharged balls becomes a multiple of 6000 balls. It is arranged to be stored in the ring buffer using bytes. In this example, a ring buffer that can store 10 pieces of information every time the number of discharged balls becomes a multiple of 6000 balls is used. With 10 pieces of information stored, a new discharged ball of 6000 balls is newly stored. When it becomes a multiple of the sphere, the oldest stored information (information corresponding to “1” in the figure) is erased and new information is stored (stored in “1” in the figure). Configured).

In addition, based on the information stored in the ring buffer described above, information relating to the cumulative number of payouts of 10 prize balls stored in the ring buffer is stored using 3 bytes. Also, information older than 10 will be erased from the ring buffer, but before the information is erased, the information is referred to at any time to determine the total number of winning prizes including the information stored in the past. Such information is also configured to be stored using 3 bytes. In addition, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio of the information relating to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 are calculated based on the information relating to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 pieces. , 1 byte is used for storage. Further, the continuous character ratio and character ratio of the information relating to the total cumulative number of prizes, which is to be calculated based on the information relating to the total cumulative number of prizes, are stored using 1 byte each. . When three pieces of data are stored as data stored in the ring buffer (when data for one round of the ring buffer is not stored), for example, the prize ball payout relating to the general winning opening P10 is performed. In the case where the data of “1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls” is stored as the number, the data of the total number of prize balls paid out of 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10 is “ The data that “500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls” is stored, and the data of the total cumulative number of prize balls paid out is the data that “500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls” is stored. The data of the number of paid balls and the data of the total number of paid prize balls are the same. On the other hand, when 12 pieces of data are stored as the data stored in the ring buffer (when more data is stored after the data of one round of the ring buffer is stored), for example, As the number of prize balls paid out for the winning opening P10, “1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls, 4: 600 balls, 5: 500 balls, 6: 700 balls, 7: 500 balls, 8: 600 When the data of “sphere, 9: 500 balls, 10: 400 balls” is stored, the data of the total number of prize balls paid out of 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10 is “500 + 600 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 700 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 400 = 5400 balls”. The data of the effect is stored, and the data of the total number of prize balls paid out is deleted from the ring buffer in addition to the above 5,400 balls. The data of "500 balls" and "800 balls" are added as the data for the last two pieces, that is, the data of "5400 + 500 + 800 = 6700 balls" is stored, and 10 sets of cumulative prize balls are stored. The data of the number of payouts and the data of the total number of prizeballs paid out are different numbers of prize balls.

  Next, FIG. 110 is a display example of the entry state display device in the eighth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure is an example of the display mode of the entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment. As described above, the entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side direction of the game machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key held by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to lock and open the door unit D18 and to confirm the substrates attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot confirm.

  The ball entry state display device J10 is configured to display 4 bits of upper 2 digits and lower 2 digits, and is configured to start the display when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Also, what is displayed is (a) a ratio of continuous character when 60,000 balls are fired, (b) a ratio of character when 60,000 balls are fired, (c) a cumulative ratio of continuous character, and (d) of a cumulative total. There are four types of character ratios, and after switching on the power of the gaming machine, switch from "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) ..." for 10 seconds each. It is configured to display four types of items. It should be noted that the above 60,000 balls are the number of shot balls for one round of the ring buffer (6000 balls × 10). Note that (a) above corresponds to the cumulative total of 10 sets of continuous character ratios stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and (b) above uses 1 byte in FIG. 109 to store. The above-mentioned (c) corresponds to the total accumulation of the continuous character ratios stored by using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and the above-mentioned (d) corresponds to the total of the set of the accessory character ratios shown in FIG. It corresponds to the total sum of the character ratios stored by using 1 byte.

  As a concrete display mode, it suggests which item is currently displayed in the upper 2 digits, and the ratio of continuous character when "C0" fires 60,000 balls, "C1" fires 60,000 balls. In this case, "A0" is the cumulative continuous character ratio, "A1" is the cumulative character ratio. In addition, the value of the item currently displayed in the lower two digits is displayed in%. The continuous accessory ratio is displayed, and when it exceeds 60, the lower two digits are displayed in a blinking manner to indicate that it is not a normal value (other If it is lit). Further, the ratio of the accessory character is displayed, and when it exceeds 70, the display mode of the lower two digits is made to blink so as to indicate that it is not a normal value (in other cases. Is lit up). In addition, when the data of the shot of 60,000 balls is not stored, for example, when only 20,000 game balls have been shot since the game machine started operating, the display mode of the upper two digits is displayed as a blinking display. It is configured to do so (otherwise it is lit). The items displayed on the incoming-ball state display device J10 are not limited to those shown in the figures, and the display mode is merely an example.

Next, the lower part of the figure is an example of a display mode different from that of the eighth embodiment of the incoming state display device J10. As shown in the figure, a 16-digit lamp is turned on to cause a game ball to be launched. The case where the number is displayed is illustrated. In the figure, “non-lighting = 0”, “red lighting = 1”, and “green lighting = 2” are shown in ternary numbers, and in the example of the same figure, ternary numbers “000000100001100” are shown. There is. Therefore, when the decimal number is used, it is "45963", which indicates that the number of the game balls to be launched is 45963. As described above, a plurality of lamps capable of expressing a ternary number in three lighting modes may be provided to be configured to be able to execute the display related to the entrance into the entrance. Further, the type of the lighting mode and the display content of the entry state display device J10 may be changed, and for example, the display may be performed using a threshold value. Specifically, "less than 40% of continuous character ratio → turn off", "40-49% of continuous character ratio → green lighting", "50-59% of continuous character ratio → yellow lighting", "ratio of continuous character ratio" For example, "60% or more → red lighting" may be configured to be notified in four types of display modes depending on the value of the continuous accessory ratio.

  With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is configured such that the ball entry state display device is provided on the main control board M and on the rear surface side of the gaming machine. By executing the calculation processing and the display processing of the information relating to the ball entering in the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used in the first ROM / RAM area, and at the same time, the ratio of character parts. By configuring so that the continuous winning character ratio can be confirmed on the ball entering state display device, it is possible to properly confirm whether the game is progressing in a normal game nail state.

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a ball entering state display device is provided on the main control board M, and information relating to ball entering in the ball entering state display device (in the present example, a character ratio and a continuous character ratio). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display the information relating to entering the ball in 7-segment for error provided on the payout control board. With such a configuration, the display start condition of the information relating to ball entry may be, for example, long pressing of the RAM clear button for a predetermined number of seconds or more. Further, in such a configuration, the display may be switched at predetermined time intervals, as in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, when "1 → 3 → 5 → 2 → 4" is switched and displayed every 3 seconds, it may be configured to notify that the payout of a total of 13,524 game balls has been carried out. ..

  Next, FIG. 111 is an example of a board surface configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. The figure shows only the right side of the game area, and exemplifies a case where the player executes a right hit (a launch mode of launching a game ball toward the right side of the game board surface). In the case of the board configuration as shown in the figure, when a right strike is executed, the game ball is configured to be easily guided to the vicinity of the second main game starting opening B10, and is not guided to the second main game starting opening B10. The game ball is configured to be guided to the general winning opening P10. That is, when the game ball is shot to enter the second main game starting port B10, almost all the game balls shot are in either the second main game starting port B10 or the general winning port P10. It is configured to be guided. With this configuration, even if the direction of the game nail is changed illegally, or the direction of the game nail is changed due to the collision of the game ball with the game nail, it is advantageous for the player 2 A game machine that is more user-friendly can be provided by configuring the game machine so that it can easily enter one of the two entrances.

  Further, in the case of such a board configuration, by calculating the winning ratio of the general winning opening P10 and the second main game starting opening B10 that can be entered by right-handing, based on the calculated winning ratio, It is possible to make it easy to grasp (analyze) the situation (direction, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning opening P10 and the second main game starting opening B10.

Further, in addition to the board configuration as shown in the figure, when the first outlet and the second outlet are provided as the outlets and the second outlet is arranged downstream of the general winning opening P10 (the general winning opening When the game ball that has not entered P10 flows down to the second out mouth), by calculating the entrance ratio between the general winning opening P10 and the second out mouth, Based on the calculated winning ratio, it is possible to easily comprehend (analyze) the situation (direction, etc.) of the game nail around the general winning opening P10.

  In addition, a security dongle may be inserted into the gaming machine according to the present example to determine whether or not the information on entering the ball is normal. Specifically, the configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether or not the information related to entering the ball is normal by shifting to the security mode. Security unless the security dongle is inserted into the control board M, the sub-control board S, the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. (unless the password in the security dongle and the password managed by the board do not match). It is configured not to enter the mode. By shifting to the security mode, it becomes possible to transmit the information relating to the ball entry to the security dongle similarly to the collating machine described above.

  The security dongle has a volatile memory and a power supply (for example, a backup battery) that supplies electric power to the volatile memory. In the volatile memory, as information on the ball entering, information on the range in which the ratio of entering the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is normal, information on the normal range of the character ratio, continuous character objects Information about a normal range of the ratio, information about a normal range of the base value, and the like may be stored. It is preferable that the information in the volatile memory be encrypted and stored in the security dongle, but in this case, the authentication side based on the information in the volatile memory decrypts the encrypted information. It is preferable to be configured so that it is possible. Further, the security dongle itself may not be provided with a power source for supplying power to the volatile memory, and instead, the power may be supplied from the prize ball payout control board side or the main control board M side. (In this case, when the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, the security information may be immediately lost from the volatile memory). If you remove the security dongle from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board and the information in the volatile memory is immediately lost, write the information to the security dongle first and Attach the security dongle (before writing) to the board or main control board, turn on the power to the game machine, connect the writer for writing information to the prize ball payout control board or main control board, and then write Write information from the writer to the security dongle (via the prize ball payout control board or the main control board), and thereafter (remove the writing writer from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board). The backup power may be supplied to the security dongle from the side or the main control board M side.

Further, the security dongle is inserted, the authentication is completed, and the mode is shifted to the security mode, so that the information on entering the ball can be transmitted from the board (for example, the main control board M) to the collating machine as described above. You may. In addition, it is possible to insert a security dongle, complete the authentication, and then shift to the security mode. Then, the game machine may be configured to shift to the security mode by performing a predetermined operation. For example, after the security dongle is authenticated, the security mode may be changed to the security mode by pressing the sub input button SB three times. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the security mode so that the mode does not shift to the security mode without using the security dongle. Therefore, the operation that the player can operate to press the sub input button SB three times is switched to the security mode. Even when the transition condition is set, the player who does not have the security dongle can be configured not to be able to shift to the security mode. Further, in the case of a gaming machine in which the entry state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described in the eighth embodiment, a security dongle is inserted to complete the authentication, and the security mode is set. As a result of the transition, information relating to the ball entry is displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 (unless the authentication by the security dongle is complete,
The information regarding the ball entry is not displayed in 10). Further, in the case of a gaming machine in which the incoming state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described above in the eighth embodiment, a security dongle is inserted, authentication is completed, and an operation member (for example, , The sub-input button SB, the firing handle D44, the RAM clear button, etc. are operated to shift to the security mode, and the information regarding the entrance is displayed on the entrance status display device J10 (authentication by the security dongle). Information relating to a ball is not displayed on the ball entering state display device J10 unless the above is completed). Also, regarding the dongle insertion opening for inserting the security dongle, even if the door unit is opened, it may be arranged at a position where it is difficult to artificially access it from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine. Good {The security dongle only needs to be electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board or the main control board. For example, the security dongle is fixed to the board and the board to board (or the prize ball payout control board or the main control board). Improves security by adopting a mode in which the connector part corresponding to the dongle insertion port is pulled out from the control board by a harness and the security dongle is connected to the connector part (in addition, it is included in the board case and caulked). In this case, there is no need to provide a dongle insertion slot, and even if the door unit is opened, Artificial access to the guru becomes difficult}.

  Further, in the present example, one out mouth C80 is provided, and the game ball entering the out mouth C80 can be detected by the out mouth entrance detection device C80s, but a plurality of out mouths may be provided. Good. For example, a total of two outlets are provided, one at the same position as this embodiment (designated as the outlet A) and one on the right side of the board (designated as the outlet B). A device for detecting a game ball may be provided at each of the one out-out port so that the game ball entering the out-out port A and the game ball entering the out-out port B can be measured. With such a configuration, it is possible to generate more detailed information regarding the flow of the game ball. That is, even when it is determined that the winning ratio of the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is not normal when the general winning opening is provided on both the left side and the right side of the game board as in this embodiment. It is not possible to judge whether the winning situation at the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game board surface is abnormal or the abnormal winning situation at the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game board surface is abnormal. Even in such a case, if the direction of the game nail located near the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game board is illegally changed and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the general winning opening, , It is difficult to enter a game ball that has not entered the general winning port into the out port B, in other words, which game pin does it become difficult to enter? It can be configured so that it is easy to determine whether or not the orientation of is changed illegally.

  Next, in FIGS. 112 to 114, in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as a configuration related to information regarding a ball entered, a count of entered balls, calculation of information regarding an entered ball, and information related to an entered ball are displayed. It is a list showing items that can be performed and a method thereof. As long as these items can be combined with each other, the combined mode is included in the content of this example, and the mode having two or more items in each classification is also included in this example. Shall be provided. Specifically, the large items are classified into 13 items A to M, and each has a plurality of small items as a subordinate concept of the large items. In the remarks column, detailed explanations of the corresponding small items, measurement (counting), calculation, reasons for displaying, and specific examples thereof are shown. Although described in detail below, the present embodiment is not limited to the mode that can be assumed from this list.

First, A.1 which is a main item shown in the upper left of FIG. As a subordinate concept of the game ball counting period (a period for counting the number of game balls entering the various entrances), there are the following small items.
A1. Counting at any time: Not limited to the period during which the maintenance mode is executed, the number of game balls entering is counted at any time during the period when the maintenance mode is not executed.
A2. Count only during maintenance mode: The number of game balls entered is counted only during the period when the maintenance mode is executed. It should be noted that it may be the entire period during execution of the maintenance mode, or may be the predetermined period during execution of the maintenance mode.
A3. Each business day or specified business period: Although the game balls can be counted even during the period when the maintenance mode is not being executed, only the designated date and time (period) can be counted, and the designated date and time ( You may comprise so that it may not count except the period. Note that the RTC may be used to determine whether or not it is the designated period. For example, when the business hours of the hall are from 9:00 to 23:00, the business hours are set to RTC (the business hours vary depending on the business area, so the setting may be changed by operating the sub-input buttons or the like. It is also possible to display the number of winning balls per unit time (preventing adjustment of the base value in the hall). For example, when the business hours are from 9:00 to 23:00, the business hours may be set and the entry into various winning openings outside the business hours may be monitored. Further, the number of balls entering each of the various entrances per unit time outside the business hours (for example, every 10 minutes outside the business hours) may be individually managed. With such a configuration, for example, it becomes possible for the person in charge of the hall to see through the base value adjustment in a short time by the maintenance of the game ball.

Next, the main item, B. As a subordinate concept of the measurement mode of information related to ball entry (measurement mode at the time of measuring information related to game ball entry into various ball entrances), there are the following small items.
B1. Predetermined operation on the sub input button: The maintenance mode can be started and operated by operating the sub input button. For example, pressing the sub input button starts measurement and then pressing the sub input button again. The measurement may be ended with.
B2. Predetermined operation on the firing handle: For example, start a predetermined operation on the firing handle (for example, touch, rotate, etc.) to start measurement, and then terminate the operation of the firing handle to perform measurement. It may be finished. The measurement may be started after the operation is continued for a certain period of time, or the measurement suspension may be suspended for a certain period of time after the operation is finished.
B3. Period during which game ball is flowing down into the game area: For example, a measurement period can be determined by providing a sensor capable of determining whether or not the game ball is flowing down into the game area.
B4. When the total number of confirmed discharged balls exceeds a predetermined value: For example, when the predetermined number is exceeded (in a period such as a predetermined time, a business day, or a business week), the data may be stored. The data is not limited to the total number of discharged balls confirmed, but the data should be saved when the countable number of entered balls such as the total number of entered balls, the number of out-passes, and the number of prize-winning balls exceeds a predetermined value. May be

Next, the major item, C.I. There are the following sub-items as a subordinate concept of the entry related count target type (classification related to entrances that can be counted).
C1. Number of balls entered into the first main game starting opening: When calculating an accessory ratio of K7, which will be described later, the number of balls won by the electric accessory is not a target. In addition, in the case of calculating the continuous character ratio of K8 described later, the number of prize balls by the character continuous device is not a target.
C2. Number of balls entered into the second main game starting opening: When calculating the ratio of the accessory character of K7, which will be described later, the number of the prize balls by the electric accessory is a target. In addition, in the case of calculating the continuous character ratio of K8 described later, the number of prize balls by the character continuous device is not a target.
C3. Number of balls entered into the special winning opening: The number of prize balls by the electric accessory is the target when calculating the K7 character ratio described later. In addition, in the case of calculating a continuous winning character ratio of K8, which will be described later, it is a target of the number of prize balls by the winning character continuous device.
C4. Number of balls entered into the general winning opening: In the case of calculating a prize ratio of K7, which will be described later, the number of balls won by the electric prize is not a target. In addition, in the case of calculating the continuous character ratio of K8 described later, the number of prize balls by the character continuous device is not a target.
C5. Total number of balls entered: This is the total number of balls entered into the game machine, and can be confirmed by, for example, the number of times the device that launches the game balls is activated and the total number of balls discharged.
C6. Number of balls coming out of the mouth: It can be detected by an out-ball entering detector. Out,
Also, a plurality of out-out entrance detecting devices may be provided.

Next, D. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the game state to be counted (by the state of a specific game state and classification regarding whether or not a special game is being executed). D1. All game states: Regardless of the current game state (for example, whether it is a time-reduced game state or whether a special game is being executed), it is counted. It should be noted that the data may be stored only when there is a game over a certain period of time.
D2. Probability change game state and time reduction game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D3. Probably variable game state and non-time-reduced game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D4. Non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D5. Non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state: It may be configured to count only the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state). Further, it may be configured to separately count two gaming states of a normal gaming state and a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (also referred to as a specific gaming state). In the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D6. During special game execution: During maintenance mode, even if the special game is not being executed, it can be forcibly changed to the special game being executed state (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). Good.
D7. No special game is being executed: During maintenance mode, even if the special game is being executed, it can be forcibly changed to a state that the special game is not being executed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). Good.

Next, the major item, E. As a subordinate concept of the confirmation method (the information regarding the game ball, which is a method of confirming the counted, calculated, and stored data from the outside), there are the following small items.
E1. Confirmation with a collation device connected to an external terminal: A dedicated machine (for example, collation device) may be connected to the external terminal to read information (for example, information such as the number of payouts is written in a specific RAM area for collation). . In this case, the maintenance mode may be omitted. The security dongle may be used to encrypt the information in the volatile memory to enhance security.
E2. Confirmed on the incoming state display device on the main control board M side: All are calculated by the program inside the gaming machine and displayed on the peripheral device.
E3. Confirmation on the effect display device on the sub-control board S side: All are calculated by the program inside the gaming machine and displayed on the peripheral device.

Next, the main item shown in the upper left of FIG. As a subordinate concept of the counting method {a method of confirming the number of balls entered or discharged (including a case where it is regarded as a pseudo number of balls entered or discharged)}, there are the following small items.
F1. Ball sensor provided in various ball entrances: The first (second) main game starting entrance ball detecting device, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detecting device, the general winning hole entrance detecting device, etc. A ball can be detected. In addition, a plurality of each entrance may be provided and may be counted individually or may be totaled and counted.
F2. Total discharge confirmation sensor: A sensor that detects all game balls that have entered the various entrances and passed through the exits.
F3. Payout Count Sensor: A sensor continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit, which measures the number of game balls paid out to the player.
F4. Sensor that detects that the firing handle is operating: A sensor that can detect that the firing handle is operating. The base value, the number of shots, or the like may be determined based on the time calculated by the internal timer by the sensor detection.
F5. Number of shots of the launch device: For example, the number of times the game ball is shot from the launch device is detected by an internal counter.
F6. A sensor for recognizing the intensity of emitting a game ball: For example, as the intensity of the launch, it is possible to judge when hitting right (strong) and when hitting left (weak), and determining the number of shot balls (or the number of discharged balls). It may be configured to provide a measurable sensor. Based on the measurement result of the sensor, it is possible to calculate the information regarding the ball entry such as the base value.

Next, G. As a subordinate concept of the operator (operator in maintenance mode), there are the following small items.
G1. Inspector: A person who confirms whether the direction of the game nail is normal, etc., and is a person who mainly uses the collator and the maintenance mode. For example, it is an inspector of a gaming machine manufacturer, an inspector of the mechanism, an inspector of a competent government agency, and the like.
G2. Hall manager: A person who can open the door unit and operate the back of the gaming machine in the maintenance mode.
G3. Player: A person who can only perform operations that anyone can operate.

Next, the main item, H.264. The following subitems are subordinate to the maintenance mode startup method and operation method (operation at maintenance startup and operation method for display selection after startup).
H1. Sub input button: It can be activated and operated by the player. It should be noted that, after starting the maintenance mode that cannot be started by the player, the operation in the maintenance mode may be enabled by inputting the sub input button.
H2. Door unit open + sub-input button: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the sub-input button, the player cannot start and operate it.
H3. Opening the door unit + operating the firing handle: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the firing handle, the player cannot start and operate. It is possible to operate from the front side of the gaming machine.
H4. Opening the door unit + operating buttons (RAM clear button, etc.) on the main control board M side: The maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the buttons on the main control board M side, so the player starts up. And cannot operate. Note that it is preferable that the game machine can be operated from the rear side and the game machine cannot be operated from the front side.
H5. Opening the door unit + Entering the entrance slot at the time of invalid winning: Entering the big winning opening when a special game is not in progress, etc. is an invalid prize, and the player opens the door unit during the game. Even when the game ball is opened, the maintenance mode is not displayed even if the game ball is inserted into the ball entrance that does not result in an invalid prize.
H6. When the collation of the password and the like is coincident: This is a condition that the player cannot start and operate the maintenance mode, and even the hall-related person cannot start up unless the collation of the password and the like is coincident. The password may be changed within a predetermined period (for example, a day of the week).

Next, I. As a subordinate concept of the area for executing the processing (the area for processing the information related to the game ball), there are the following small items.
I1. Winning detection is executed on the main control board M side: winning number information may be transmitted to the sub control board, and the base value and the like may be calculated and displayed on the sub control board S side.
I2. Execution of information relating to winning is executed on the main control board M side: prize number information (for example, the number of passing through each winning opening switch) and the number of payouts are displayed on the display of the main control board M. It should be noted that it is possible to use an area (for example, the second program) that is not used during normal game progress.
I3. Execution of information relating to ball entry on the side of the sub-control board S: The display mode on the display device on the side of the main control board M may be different between when the normal game is in progress and when the maintenance mode is displayed (for example, (The amount of information that can be displayed, such as full-color display, may be increased.)
I4. Display of result of calculation of information relating to ball entry on main control board M side: Display on ball entry status display device. The main game symbol display device and the auxiliary game symbol display device can also be displayed in a mode (for example, color display or blinking display) different from that during normal game progress.
I5. Display of calculation result of information relating to ball entry on sub-control board S side: display on effect display device. It should be noted that as the effect display device, a first effect display device and a second effect display device may be provided, and the information related to ball entry may be displayed on the second effect display device. The second effect display device is, for example, an effect display device that has a display area that is narrower than the first effect display device in its display area, and is displayed on the first effect display device in its display target, for example. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which display objects different from the decorative pattern, the hold image, and the error display image can be displayed.
I6. Calculation of information relating to ball entry is performed on the main control board M side and the sub-control board S side respectively: The calculation results of both may be collated to detect an error (in this case, the main control board M side). The sub-control board S side may have a different counting period).
I7. Execution of information related to ball entry is performed by processing in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: Winning may be detected, calculated, or displayed in an area that is not used during normal game progress.
I8. The display processing of the calculation result of the information relating to the ball entering is executed by the processing in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: The prize is detected, calculated, or displayed in the area not used during the normal game progress. Good

Next, a major item, J. As a subordinate concept of the method of measuring time (the method of measuring a period which is a reference unit of information related to entering a ball), there are the following small items.
J1. Interrupt timer: A timer measurement process is provided in the interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals.
J2. Clock outside game machine (for example, wristwatch, stopwatch): The inspector himself measures the time, not the timer inside the game machine.
J3. RTC: Timer measurement is performed using RTC.

Next, K.K., which is the main item shown in the upper left of FIG. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the display target of the maintenance mode (information relating to the game ball that can be displayed during the maintenance mode).
K1. Base value: For example, the base value at the time of activation of the maintenance mode may be displayed, the base value for a predetermined period during the activation of the maintenance mode, or the base value of only a specific game state may be displayed.
K2. Ball entry ratio between main game starting opening and general winning opening: For example, whether it is normal or abnormal may be displayed at a predetermined timing (a predetermined total number of discharges, a total number of prizes, etc.).
K3. Number of Balls Entered at Starting Port, General Prize Port, and Special Winning Port: The number of balls entered at the starting port, general winning port, and special winning port only in a specific game state may be displayed.
K4. Number of prize balls of starting opening, general winning opening and special winning opening: The number of winning balls of the starting opening, general winning opening and special winning opening only in a specific game state may be displayed.
K5. Total number of winnings: The total number of winnings at the starting opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening.
K6. Total discharge confirmation number: This is synonymous with the number of all game balls that have been shot, and is the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter.
K7. Character ratio: The ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls by the prize hole (in this example, the second main game starting port) provided with the large prize hole and the electric prize.
K8. Percentage of consecutive prizes: The ratio of the number of prize balls from the special winning opening to all prize balls.
K9. Number of shot balls: The number of all game balls shot.

Next, the major item, L. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the maintenance mode display method (a method of displaying information on game balls during the maintenance mode).
L1. Ball entry state display device (main control board M side): Displayed in 7 segments on the board surface (× 2 in this example).
L2. Effect display device (sub-control board S side): A second effect display device may be provided and displayed.
L3. Dedicated display on the prize-ball payout control board: It is invisible to the player (for example, 7-segment display).
L4. Dedicated display device on the main control board: It is invisible to the player (for example, a 7 segment display device, 7 segments × 4 in this example).
L5. 1st (2nd) main game symbol display device: Only during the maintenance mode, it may be possible to light in a specific mode as a specific lamp lighting mode.
L6. Auxiliary game symbol display device: Only during the maintenance mode, it may be possible to light in a specific mode as a specific lamp lighting mode.
L7. Frame decoration lamp (may be a game effect lamp D26): various lighting modes may be used depending on the type of lamp that can be lit in three or more lighting modes (for example, a special drawing and a general winning a prize are selected. The ratio is notified by the light emission mode). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify a lot of information as the information on entering the ball.
L8. Voice: It may be possible to notify by voice whether the information relating to the ball entry is normal or abnormal. Note that the volume and the like may be different depending on whether it is normal or abnormal.

The major item is M. As a subordinate concept of a backup mode (a mode of storing information about game balls), there are the following small items.
M1. Backup of information such as the number of winnings only when a predetermined condition is met: The predetermined condition is, for example, a day when the number of shots is 10,000 balls or more, a day when the discharge number is 6000 balls or more, and a steering wheel operation for a predetermined time. , A predetermined number of out-of-mouth detection balls, a predetermined number of prize-winning balls, and the like.
M2. Regardless of whether the conditions are satisfied, backup for a fixed period of time may be performed by sequentially overwriting and updating.
M3. The erased data on the main control board M side is backed up on the sub control board S side: For example, it may be stored in the FRWM on the sub control board S side.
M4. No backup: When the power is restored, information such as the number of winning prizes may be cleared.
M5. Erase old information when new information is saved: For example, a ring buffer may be used for backup.

  Further, the pachinko game machine in this example may have the following configuration. In addition, a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and provided.

  To prevent cases in which the person in charge of the hall adjusts the base value such as the number of winnings outside business hours (for example, manually throwing the game ball into the general winning opening), for example, the sub-control board The S side may be configured to store the number of winnings per unit time and the like.

  Further, it may be configured such that the password to be verified at the time of starting the maintenance mode is changed for each day of the week or the date, and the maintenance mode can be started (displayed) only when the input key and the verification key match.

The main control board M side and the sub-control board S side may both be configured to collect the information regarding the ball entry and to confirm whether or not there is any discrepancy in the totaled results of both. In this case, the main control board M side collects data every hour, while the sub control board S side collects data every 15 minutes, so that the sub control board S side and the main control board M side collect data. The period may be different. For example, when the sub-control board S side collects data in a shorter period than the main control board M side, the sub-control board S side increases a large number of balls in a short period of time. It may be a criterion that some kind of adjustment or fraud may be implemented sooner or later. Since the sub-control board S has a larger capacity, the capacity problem is less likely to occur in storing the number of winnings per unit period even when the total period is shortened.

  The configuration may be such that the information data relating to a ball that has been erased on the main control board M side is stored in the FRWM on the sub control board S side. With such a configuration, it becomes impossible for a person in charge of the game arcade to erase and adjust the data, for example, by removing the battery or short-circuiting the battery in order to adjust the ball entering the ball.

  Totaling may be performed during the firing of the game ball (for example, a period during which the firing handle D44 is on by a firing handle touch sensor (a sensor that detects that the firing handle D44 is being operated)). After detection by the firing handle touch sensor, start counting the number of balls entered after entering any of the ball entrances, and after a certain period of time (or firing when the firing handle touch sensor does not detect). It is also possible to total the number of balls entered until a certain period after the game balls are won.

  A sensor that recognizes the intensity of the game sphere (referred to as a game sphere emission intensity recognition sensor) recognizes the intensity of the intensity, and when the player hits the right ball (launch strength = strong) and the left ball (launch strength = weak). The game state is judged depending on which is executed (non-time-reduced game state when left-handed, time-reduced game state when right-handed, etc.), and data corresponding to the determined game state is calculated. It may be that.

  By opening the front door unit D18 (the door opening flag is on), and winning the winning opening at the time of invalid winning (for example, entering the large winning opening when the special game is not being executed) The maintenance mode may be displayed. In order to prevent the player from seeing the maintenance mode display when the prize is released when the door unit D18 is cleared and the grape clogging is cleared, the player can see the maintenance mode display when the prize is invalid. It is supposed to be displayed only in case of.

  In addition to displaying the total of all the winning ratios, the winning ratio may be displayed according to the winning openings (first (second) main game starting opening, large winning opening, and general winning opening). ..

  Since all the winning and passing numbers and the number of balls entered from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side are transmitted as commands, the sub control board S side displays the time series of each data. By displaying the graph, it is possible to confirm the change in the base value, the presence / absence of execution of an illegal game, and the like from the slope of the graph.

  Information related to entering the display device (entering state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device, etc.) on the main control substrate M side by control by the main control substrate M side When displaying, it is necessary to expand the data for display and display it. However, when a collator is used, the data is directly sucked from the specified RAM and displayed in hexadecimal etc. on the collator. It becomes possible.

  The number of winnings and the number of payouts of each winning opening may be displayed on the display on the main control board M side. With such a configuration, switching of each display content can be performed by, for example, pressing the RAM clear button. Further, the maintenance mode may be displayed under the condition that the disconnection short circuit error can be displayed (for example, the connector at the starting opening is removed), and the display content of the maintenance mode may be invisible to the player. ..

An error indicator for an error provided on the prize ball payout control board (eg,
7-segment display) may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the number of payouts at that time from the power-on on the actual machine. Further, the number of prize balls (the number of payouts) may be output to the outer end as the prize ball information.

  On the side of the main control board M, the number of balls (= the number of shot balls) that have passed to the outlet, the total number of payouts (the total number of payouts), the value for low base calculation (depending on the specific winning port in the non-time shortened gaming state Save the four data of the sum of the number of prize balls), the value for high base calculation (the sum of the number of prize balls by a specific winning opening in the time-saving game state), and display the data on the indicator light on the main control board M side. It may be used for data display.

  By constantly monitoring the information related to entering the ball, a value for low base calculation {base value, non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (main game probability variation flag is off and main game shortening flag is off ) Is calculated from the main control board M side under conditions such that the value for low base calculation / the number of shot balls × 100 (%) is less than a predetermined%. A command may be transmitted to the side of the sub-control board S, and a notification may be given by an effect display device, a frame decoration lamp (may be the game effect lamp D26), or the like.

  The main control board M side may be configured to transmit all the number of passages to each win / out port and the number of prize balls from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. In such a case, the sub control may be performed. Also on the board S side, it is possible to execute the same or higher display as that on the main control board M side by the effect display device.

  By the control on the main control board M side, data such as the number of winnings is displayed on the display device on the main control board M side (entering state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device). When displaying, for example, during the display of the standby demo screen, in order not to disturb the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol display, the number of continuous operation of the condition device (number of consecutive holidays), the status notification when the power is turned on, etc. Alternatively, a switch on the back side of the board may be used) to shift to the maintenance mode.

  The game board surface may be formed as an integral molded product so that no game nail is used at all. Further, the game nails related to the winning openings may be U-shaped nails and may be in a continuous form. In addition, the fact that the game nail is not displaced from the initial position may be provided at a glance by providing a marking (for example, a colored marking) of such a size that the head of the game nail is hidden. ..

In addition, the gaming machine in this example may be configured such that the player can display information relating to entering a ball. Therefore, an example of the configuration in which the player can display the information about entering the ball will be described in detail below.
(1) The information related to entering the ball is always displayed on the effect display device.
(2) By a predetermined operation on the standby demo screen (when there is no hold), it is possible to arbitrarily select whether or not to display the total number of balls entered during the game.
(3) When the player performs a predetermined operation during the game, it is possible to arbitrarily switch to a state in which the total number of balls entered can be displayed.
(4) When a specific effect is executed in a situation where the effect display device is displaying the information related to the ball entry, the information related to the ball entry is not displayed during execution of the specific effect. (Display again after the production is finished).
(5) When the effect display device is configured to have two effect display devices, a first effect display device and a second effect display device, it is displayed in a part of the display area of the first effect display device. It is possible to switch the information related to the entered ball to be displayed on the second effect display device.
It may be configured as described above.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiment is added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. You may.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An operable operation member (for example, a sub-input button SB, a firing handle D44) provided on the front side of the gaming machine,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10 and an effect display device SG) is provided,
A game to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20). The information display section (for example, the ball entering state display device J10 and the effect display device SG) can display a ball entering state display, which is a display based on the ball entering state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation member (for example, the sub-input button SB, the firing handle D44), the entry state display is displayed. It is a Pachinko game machine.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (2),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An operable operation member (for example, a sub-input button SB, a firing handle D44) provided on the back side of the gaming machine,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10 and an effect display device SG) is provided,
A game to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). The information display unit (for example, the entry state display device J10) can display a entry state display, which is a display based on the entry state of the ball,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation member (for example, the sub-input button SB, the firing handle D44), the entry state display is displayed. It is a Pachinko game machine.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (3),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
An information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls information display,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Control information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S). MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the control information received by the control information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the information display content control unit (for example, the information display content control unit for controlling the information display content displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
As the control information, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening P10) detected by the entry determining means (eg, entering determination means MJ10). , The first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) to the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) side, the ball detection information, which is information based on the status of the game balls entering each winning hole Can be sent,
When the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) receives the ball detection information from the main game section (for example, the main control board M), based on the ball detection information, the plurality of winning openings (for example, , First main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Pachinko game characterized in that it is configured to generate ball entry state information that is information and to display a display based on the created ball entry state information on an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG). Is a machine.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (4),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
An information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls information display,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Information based on the entry of the game ball into the plurality of winning openings (eg, the first main game starting opening A10 and the general winning opening P10) based on the detection result by the winning determination means (eg, the entering determination means MJ10). Ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating the ball entry state information
Control information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S). MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the control information received by the control information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), an information display content control unit for controlling the information display content displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Prepare,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
As the control information, it is possible to transmit incoming ball state information to the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) side,
When the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) receives the incoming state information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), the information display unit (for example, the display based on the incoming state information) It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it can be displayed on the effect display device SG).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (5),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game is provided,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determining means (for example, entrance determining means MJ10) capable of detecting
Equipped with
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first) The winning state information which is the information based on the entering state of the game ball into each winning port at the special winning port C10 and the second winning port C20) is generated, and the display based on the generated winning state information is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be displayed by a section (for example, a ball entering state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (6),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main game section (for example, a main control board M) provided on the back side of the game machine for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display unit (for example, a ball entering state display device J10) capable of displaying information attached to a main game unit (for example, a main control board M) is provided,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determining means (for example, entrance determining means MJ10) capable of detecting
Equipped with
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first) The winning state information that is the information based on the entering state of the game balls into the special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) is generated, and the display based on the generated winning state information is displayed on the information display unit (for example, This is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it can be displayed on a ball entering state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (7),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
The main game department is
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) A period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring a period for monitoring
Based on the detection result detected by the entry determination means (eg, entry determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (eg, base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start) Mouth A10, second main game starting mouth B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Is configured to obtain
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that a display based on the entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the entry state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (8),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, entry state display device J10),
A launching device (eg, launching device D42) capable of launching a game ball into the game area,
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
And a period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring a period during which a game ball is being shot by a launching device (for example, launching device D42),
Based on the detection result detected by the entry determination means (eg, entry determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (eg, base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start) Mouth A10, second main game starting mouth B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Is configured to obtain
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that a display based on the entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the entry state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (9),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering a predetermined prize hole, there is a first game state and a second game state in which it is easier to enter the predetermined prize hole than the first game state,
A game to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20). The information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the ball entry state display device J10) can display a ball entry state display which is a display based on the ball entry state,
It is configured that the display mode of the entry state display is different between the case where the entry state display is displayed in the first gaming state and the case where the entry state display is displayed in the second gaming state. It is a characteristic pachinko machine.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (10),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, and a first winning opening in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters Special winning opening C10, second winning opening C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
Detection of a game ball entering the plurality of winning openings (for example, the main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) Possible entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10),
Based on the detection result detected by the ball determining unit (for example, the ball determining unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, A winning state information generating means (for example, a maintenance mode controlling means MO) which generates the entering state information which is information based on the entering state of the game balls into the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20). Equipped with
A pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be able to retain the relevant entry state information even after the power is cut off while the entry state information is being held, and the power is cut off. Is.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (11),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result detected by the ball determining unit (for example, the ball determining unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, A winning state information generating means (for example, a maintenance mode controlling means MO) which generates the entering state information which is information based on the entering state of the game balls into the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20). ,
With a ball input state output terminal (for example, an external terminal) that is an output terminal capable of outputting ball state information,
Pachinko characterized by being configured to output the incoming state information generated by the incoming state information generating means (for example, the maintenance mode control means MO) at an incoming state output terminal (for example, an external terminal). It is a game machine.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means, MJ11-A first main game start mouth ball entry determination means MJ11-B second main game start mouth ball entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start Mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C10 First prize winning entrance determination means, MJ11-C20 Second prize winning entrance determination means MJ11-P General award entrance determination means, MJ11-C80 Out entrance determination means MJ11-C90 Total discharge ball confirmation means, MJ11c-90 Total discharge confirmation number counter MJ10b Entrance related information temporary storage means, MJ12c Start mouth entrance number counter MJ13c General entrance number counter, MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-A No. 1 main game random number acquisition determination executing means, MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means, MJ30 hold control means MJ31 hold digestion control means, MJ31j variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ32 symbol hold means, MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MJ32-B No. 2 main game symbol holding means MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol holding information MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determining means MN10 winning and drawing lottery means, MN11-A First main game win / loss lottery means MN11ta-A First main game win / win lottery table, MN11-B Second main game win / win lottery means MN11ta-B Second main game win / loss lot table, MN11-H Auxiliary game win / loss Lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win / loss table, MN40 symbol content determination means M N41-A 1st main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary Game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 variation mode determination means, MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2 main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress means MP10 display control means , MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C first and second main game diagram Fluctuation management timer, MP11-H auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B second main game start port electric auditors opening and closing control means MP21-B second main game start port electric role Object opening / closing condition determining means, MP22t-B second main game starting opening electric auditory object opening timer MP22t2 second main game starting opening entrance waiting timer, MP30 special game controlling means MP31 condition judging means, MP32 special game content determining means MP32ta special Game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C first and second special winning opening electric auditors opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP34t2 open timer, MP34t3 large Prize winning entrance waiting timer MP50 specific game control means, MP51 probability change Completion condition determination means MP52 time saving end condition determination means, MP52c time saving counter MB game state temporary storage means, MB10-C first / second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C first / second main game symbol information temporary storage Means, MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b special game related information temporary storage means MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means, MO maintenance mode control means ME fraud detection information management means , MEb Unauthorized related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means, MT10 Command transmission buffer MG External signal output control means, MH Prize ball payout determination means MHsj Payout information transmission / reception means, MHsjb Payout command temporary storage means MHc Prize ball number counter, MHb Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means A 1st main game peripheral equipment, A10 1st main game start mouth A11s 1st main game start mouth entrance detection device, A11s2 1st main game start mouth confirmation sensor A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol Display part A21h 1st main game symbol reservation display part, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game starting port, B11s 2nd main game starting port entrance detection device B11d 2nd main game starting port Electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display section, B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section C 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral equipment, C10 1st big winning a prize C11s 1st big winning a prize Detecting device, C11d 1st special winning opening electric prize C20 2nd special winning prize, C21s 2nd special winning prize winning detecting device C21d 2nd special winning prize electric prize, P10 general winning prize P11s general winning prize detecting device , J10 entrance state display device C80 out mouth, C80s out mouth entrance detection device C90s total discharge confirmation sensor H auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 auxiliary game starting port H11s auxiliary game starting port entrance detecting device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative design display control means SM21n design drawing display content determination means, SM21ta design drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b temporary design related information temporary storage means , SM21t Design variation time management timer SM22 Design suspension information display control means, SM22b Design suspension information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means, SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means, SM24 Notice Effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determination means, SM24b Notice effect related information temporary storage means SM25 Reach effect display control means, SM25n Reach effect display content determination means SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means, SM30 error Notification control means SM31 Error occurrence determination means, SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Production display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 Sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Production display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area, SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section SB sub input button, SBs sub input button input detection device KH prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device MHc-2 Normal prize Ball counter, SM32 Maintenance mode display control means MJ11c-C91 Normal total discharge confirmation number counter, MJ11c-C92 Total discharge maintenance counter MHc-3 Prize ball maintenance counter, SN10c Sub side Normal prize ball counter SJ10c Sub side total discharge check A few cows SM32t Base measurement timer SJ11c Sub-side starting opening ball number counter, SJ13c Sub-side general ball number counter SRc RAM clear count counter, MHc-4 non-use object counter MHc-5 role object counter, MHc-6 continuous role Thing counter

Claims (1)

A plurality of winning openings, in which game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls,
An information display part that can display information,
With a launcher capable of launching a game ball into the game area,
Entry determination means capable of detecting entry of game balls into the plurality of winning openings,
With a period measuring means capable of measuring the period during which the game ball is being launched by the launching device,
Based on the detection result detected by the ball entrance determination means in the period measured by the period measurement means, it is configured to be able to generate the ball entry state information which is information based on the entry status of the game balls into the plurality of winning openings. Cage,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that a display based on entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit.

Images